Skip to content

੧. ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤ੍ਯਧ੍ਯਾਯਃ

Adhikarana ਮਙ੍ਗਲਾਚਰਣਂ · Śloka

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਸਹਸ੍ਰਾਕ੍ਸਂ ਗਣਾਧੀਸ਼ਂ ਸ੍ਵਗੁਰੁਂ ਚ ਸਰਸ੍ਵਤੀਮ੍| ਜਨਕਂ ਜਨਯਿਤ੍ਰੀਂ ਚ ਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਦੌ ਪ੍ਰਣਮਾਮ੍ਯਹਮ੍|| ਸਮਸ੍ਤਜਨਪਦਤਿਲਕਕਲ੍ਪੇ ਸ਼੍ਰੀਭਾਦਾਨਕਦੇਸ਼ੇ ਨਗਰੀਵਰਮਥੁਰਾਸਮੀਪੇ ਅਙ੍ਕੋਲਾਨਾਮਕਂ ਵੈਦ੍ਯਸ੍ਥਾਨਮਸ੍ਤਿ| ਯਤ੍ਰ ਸੌਰਵਂਸ਼ਜਾ ਬ੍ਰਾਹ੍ਮਣਾਃ ਸਮਸ੍ਤਭੂਮਿਪਤਿਮਾਨ੍ਯਾ ਅਸ਼੍ਵਿਨੀਕੁਮਾਰਸਮਾਨਾਃ ਪਾਰ੍ਵਣਚਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਰੁਚਿਯਸ਼ਃਪ੍ਰਸਾਧਿਤਦਿਙ੍ਮਣ੍ਡਲਾ ਵੈਦ੍ਯਾ ਅਭੂਵਨ੍| ਤਦਨ੍ਵਯੇ ਗੋਵਿਨ੍ਦਨਾਮਾ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਕਸ਼ਿਰੋਮਣਿਰਭੂਤ੍, ਤਤਸ੍ਤਤ੍ਪੁਤ੍ਰੋ ਭਿਸਕ੍ਸ਼ਿਰੋਮੁਕੁਟਮਣਿਰ੍ਜਯਪਾਲਃ ਸਮਜਨਿ, ਤਤ੍ਤਨਯਸ਼੍ਚ ਸਮਸ੍ਤਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਰ੍ਥਤਤ੍ਤ੍ਵਜ੍ਞੋ ਭਰਤਪਾਲਃ ਸਞ੍ਜਾਤਃ, ਤਤ੍ਪੁਤ੍ਰਃ ਸ੍ਵਕੁਲਨਭਸ੍ਤਲਚਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਮਾ ਵਿਵੇਕਬਹਸ੍ਪਤਿਃ ਸ਼੍ਰੀਸਹਪਾਲਦੇਵਨਪਤਿਵਲ੍ਲਭਃ ਸ਼੍ਰੀਡਲ੍ਹਣਃ ਸਮਭੂਤ੍| ਤੇਨ ਸ਼੍ਰੀਜੇਜ੍ਜਟਂ ਟੀਕਾਕਾਰਂ ਸ਼੍ਰੀਗਯਦਾਸਭਾਸ੍ਕਰੌ ਚ ਪਞ੍ਜਿਕਾਕਾਰੌ ਸ਼੍ਰੀਮਾਧਵਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਦੇਵਾਦੀਨ੍ ਟੀਪ੍ਪਨਕਾਰਾਂਸ਼੍ਚੋਪਜੀਵ੍ਯ, ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਾਯ ਨਿਬਨ੍ਧਸਙ੍ਗ੍ਰਹਃ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇ| ਯਦ੍ਯਪਿ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤੋਪਰਿ ਜੇਜ੍ਜਟਾਦਿਭਿਸ੍ਟੀਕਾ ਰਚਿਤਾਃ, ਤਥਾਪਿ ਤਾਸਾਂ ਕੁਸ਼ਾਗ੍ਰੀਯਧਿਯਾਮਭਿਗਮ੍ਯਤ੍ਵਾਦਲ੍ਪਮੇਧਸਾਮਨੁਗ੍ਰਹਾਯ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤੁਕਾਮਸ੍ਯ ਮਮ ਪ੍ਰਯਾਸਃ ਸਫਲਃ|

Meaning of the commentary

At the beginning of the work, the commentator bows to Sahasraksha, Ganadhisha, his own teacher, Sarasvati, and his father and mother. He then describes Ankola, a settlement of physicians near Mathura in the region named Bhadanaka. Its Brahmana physicians of the Saura lineage are praised as honoured by rulers, comparable to the Ashvini Kumaras, and renowned in every direction. The family account proceeds from Govinda, an eminent physician, to his son Jayapala, then to his son Bharatapala, and finally to Dalhana. Dalhana is praised for his understanding and discernment and described as favoured by King Sahapaladeva. Dalhana states that he is composing the Nibandhasangraha to explain Sushruta's Ayurvedic treatise, drawing on Jejjata's tika, the panjikas of Gayadasa and Bhaskara, and the explanatory notes of Madhava, Brahmadeva, and others. Although earlier commentaries already exist, he considers his effort useful because those works are accessible mainly to exceptionally sharp intellects; his explanation is intended to help students of more modest understanding.

Key terms

निबन्धसङ्ग्रहः (nibandhasaṅgrahaḥ)
The commentary that Dalhana states he is composing to explain Sushruta.
टीकाकारं (ṭīkākāraṃ)
Author of an explanatory commentary; here used of Jejjata.
पञ्जिकाकारौ (pañjikākārau)
The two authors of panjika commentaries, here Gayadasa and Bhaskara.
अल्पमेधसाम् (alpamedhasām)
Of readers of modest understanding, whom the commentator intends to assist.

Adhikarana ੨ (੧-੨) · Śloka ੨

ਅਥਾਤੋ ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਸ੍ਯਾਮਃ ||੧|| ਯਥੋਵਾਚ ਭਗਵਾਨ੍ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਃ ||੨||

View original

अथातो वेदोत्पत्तिमध्यायं व्याख्यास्यामः ||१|| यथोवाच भगवान् धन्वन्तरिः ||२||

Meaning of the śloka

Now, therefore, we shall explain the chapter on the origin of the Veda, as the revered Dhanvantari taught it.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਥਾਤੋ ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਸ੍ਯਾਮ ਇਤਿ| ਨਨੁ, ਕਤਮਤ੍ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਮਿਦਂ? ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਾਨਿ ਹਿ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਾਣਿ ਭਵਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਦ੍ਯਥਾ- ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸਂਸ੍ਕਰ੍ਤਸੂਤ੍ਰਮ੍, ਏਕੀਯਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ, ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ, ਗੁਰੁਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ ਚੇਤਿ| ਇਹ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸਂਸ੍ਕਰ੍ਤਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ ਨਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਯੇਵੇਤ੍ਯੇਕੇ, ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤ੍ਵਸ੍ਤੀਤਿ ਭਾਸਨ੍ਤੇ, ਯਥਾ ਚ ਤਦਸ੍ਤਿ ਤਥੇਹੈਵ ਨੈਕਟ੍ਯੇਨ ਕਥਯਿਸ੍ਯਾਮਃ; ਏਕੀਯਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ ਯਥਾ- ‘ਤਤ੍ਰ ਲੋਹਿਤਕਪਿਲਪਾਣ੍ਡੁਪੀਤਨੀਲਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਲੇਸ੍ਵਵਨਿਪ੍ਰਦੇਸ਼ੇਸੁ ਮਧੁਰਾਮ੍ਲਲਵਣਕਟੁਤਿਕ੍ਤਕਸਾਯਾਣਿ ਯਥਾਸਙ੍ਖ੍ਯਮੁਦਕਾਨਿ ਭਵਨ੍ਤੀਤ੍ਯੇਕੇ ਭਾਸਨ੍ਤੇ’(ਸੂ. ਅ. ੪੫)- ਇਤਿ; ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ ਯਥਾ- ‘ਵਾਯੋਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਤਿਭੂਤਸ੍ਯ ਵ੍ਯਾਪਨ੍ਨਸ੍ਯ ਚ ਲਕ੍ਸਣਮ੍| ਸ੍ਥਾਨਂ ਕਰ੍ਮ ਚ ਰੋਗਾਂਸ਼੍ਚ ਵਦਸ੍ਵ ਵਦਤਾਂਵਰ’ (ਨਿ. ਅ. ੧)- ਇਤਿ; ਗੁਰੁਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ ਯਥਾ- ‘ਦੇਹੇ ਵਿਚਰਤਸ੍ਤਸ੍ਯ ਲਕ੍ਸਣਾਨਿ ਨਿਬੋਧ ਮੇ’ (ਨਿ. ਅ. ੧)- ਇਤਿ; ਏਵਂ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਾਣਾਮਨੇਕਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ ਕਸ੍ਯੇਦਂ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਮ੍? ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ- ਗੁਰੋਰੇਵੈਤਤ੍ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ, ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯੇਣ ਗ੍ਰਨ੍ਥਂ ਚਿਕੀਰ੍ਸਤਾ ਲਿਖਿਤਮ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਸ੍ਯੈਵੇਦਂ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਹੁਃ, ਸ ਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ਮਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯੇਸੁ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯੇਸੁ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਜ੍ਞਾਂ ਕਤਵਾਨ੍; ਤਨ੍ਨੇਚ੍ਛਤਿ ਗਯੀ| ਕਿਮੇਤਤ੍ ਸ੍ਵਕਪੋਲਕਲ੍ਪਿਤਂ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤੇਨੋਕ੍ਤਮ੍, ਅਥਵਾ ਯਥੈਵ ਗੁਰੁਣੋਦੀਰਿਤਮਿਤਿ ਪਸ੍ਟਃ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸਂਸ੍ਕਰ੍ਤਾ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਮੁਖੇਨੇਦਮਾਹ- ਯਥੋਵਾਚ ਭਗਵਾਨ੍ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਰਿਤਿ| ਇਦਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸਂਸ੍ਕਰ੍ਤਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ, ਯਤ੍ਰ ਯਤ੍ਰ ਪਰੋਕ੍ਸੇ ਲਿਟ੍ਪ੍ਰਯੋਗਸ੍ਤਤ੍ਰ ਤਤ੍ਰੈਵ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸਂਸ੍ਕਰ੍ਤਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ ਜ੍ਞਾਤਵ੍ਯਮਿਤਿ; ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸਂਸ੍ਕਰ੍ਤਾਪੀਹ ਨਾਗਾਰ੍ਜੁਨ ਏਵ| ਅਥਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋਨਨ੍ਤਰਾਰ੍ਥ ਏਵ| ਅਤੋ ਯੁਸ੍ਮਚ੍ਛਲ੍ਯਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੋਪਦੇਸ਼ਕਾਮਿਤਾਦਨਨ੍ਤਰਮ੍| ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਮਿਤਿ ਅਸ੍ਯਾਦੌ ਆਯੁਃਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋ ਲੁਪ੍ਤੋ ਜ੍ਞੇਯਃ; ਤੇਨ, ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਮਿਤਿ| ਉਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਰਤ੍ਰਾਭਿਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤਿਃ, ਨ ਤ੍ਵਭੂਤਪ੍ਰਾਦੁਰ੍ਭਾਵਃ| ਅਧੀਯਨ੍ਤੇਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਨਰ੍ਥਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਧ੍ਯਾਯਃ| ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਸ੍ਯਾਮ ਇਤਿ ਵਿਰ੍ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸੇ, ਆਙ੍ ਅਭਿਵ੍ਯਾਪ੍ਤੌ, ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਸ੍ਯਾਮਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਥਯਿਸ੍ਯਾਮਃ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ, ਅਥਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਪ੍ਰਸ਼੍ਨਾਨਨ੍ਤਰ੍ਯੇ , ਅਤਃਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋ ਹੇਤ੍ਵਰ੍ਥਃ, ਯਤ ਏਤੇ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਾਃ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਹਿਤਾਰ੍ਥਮਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਂ ਗੁਰੁਂ ਪਪ੍ਰਚ੍ਛੁਃ, ਅਤੋ ਹੇਤੋਰਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ; ਅਪਰੇ ਤੁ ਵਿਰ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਪ੍ਰਕਾਰੇ, ਆਙ੍ ਆਭਿਮੁਖ੍ਯੇ, ਸ਼ੇਸਂ ਸਮਮ੍| ਏਤੇਨਾਤਃ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੋਪਦੇਸ਼ਕਾਮਿਤਾਦਨਨ੍ਤਰਮ੍, ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਾਭਿਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤਿਮਧਿਕਤ੍ਯ ਕਤੋ ਯੋਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ੍ਤਂ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਾਭਿਵ੍ਯਾਪ੍ਤ੍ਯਾ ਪ੍ਰਕਥਯਿਸ੍ਯਾਮਃ| ਦ੍ਵਿਤੀਯਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਪਕ੍ਸੇਪੀਤ੍ਥਂ ਯੋਜਨੀਯਮ੍| ਯਥੋਵਾਚੇਤਿ ਯਾਦਗੁਕ੍ਤਵਾਨ੍| ਭਗਵਾਨ੍ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਰਿਤਿ ਸਮਸ੍ਤੈਸ਼੍ਵਰ੍ਯਮਾਹਾਤ੍ਮ੍ਯਯਸ਼ਃਸ਼੍ਰੀਕਾਮਾਰ੍ਥਪ੍ਰਯਤ੍ਨੈਰ੍ਯੁਕ੍ਤੋ ‘ਭਗਵਾਨ੍’ ਇਤ੍ਯੁਚ੍ਯਤੇ; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਜ੍ਞਾਨਾਤਿਸ਼ਯਵਾਨ੍ ਪੁਰੁਸਾਤਿਸ਼ਯੋ ਭਗਵਾਨ੍; ਅਪਰੇ ਤੁ, ਅਸ੍ਟਗੁਣੈਸ਼੍ਵਰ੍ਯਵਾਨੇਵਾਤ੍ਰ ਭਗਵਾਨ੍| ਅਥਾਤ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਕਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਜ੍ਞਾਸੂਤ੍ਰਂ ਯਦ੍ਯਪ੍ਯਧ੍ਯਾਯਾਦੌ ਲਿਖਿਤਂ, ਤਥਪਿ ‘ਵਤ੍ਸ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤ’ (ਸੂ. ਅ. ੧, ਸੂ. ਅ. ੧੪) ਇਤ੍ਯਨਨ੍ਤਰਂ ਦ੍ਰਸ੍ਟਵ੍ਯਮ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ‘ਅਧ੍ਯਾਪ੍ਯਾਸ਼੍ਚ ਭਵਨ੍ਤੋ ਵਤ੍ਸਾਃ’ (ਸੂ. ਅ. ੧, ਸੂ. ਅ. ੫) ਇਤ੍ਯਨਨ੍ਤਰਂ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ, ਤਨ੍ਨੇਚ੍ਛਤਿ ਗਯੀ| ਅਤ੍ਰ ਕੇਚਿਦ੍ ‘ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਂ ਨਾਮਾਧ੍ਯਾਯਂ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ||੧-੨||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator first asks whose statement the opening formula is. He distinguishes four kinds of sutra: a reviser's statement, a view attributed to certain authorities, a student's statement, and a teacher's statement. His examples include a view relating the tastes of water to the colours of land, a student's question about Vayu, and a teacher's reply. He records disagreement about whether reviser's statements occur in this work. One interpretation treats the opening promise to explain the chapter as the teacher's words, recorded by the student while compiling the treatise. Another treats it as the student's promise to his own students, who are Dhanvantari's students in the next generation; Gayi does not accept that interpretation. The words 'as the revered Dhanvantari taught' are explained as a reviser's assurance, voiced through Sushruta, that the account follows the teacher rather than Sushruta's invention. The commentator identifies this reviser as Nagarjuna and takes the use of the lit verbal form for an event outside the speaker's direct experience as a sign of such a reviser's statement. These are the commentator's textual interpretations. In one explanation, atha indicates what follows the students' wish to receive instruction in Shalyatantra. Another takes atha as following their question and atah as giving the reason: they have asked about Ayurveda for the welfare of people. The commentator supplies the omitted word ayus before veda, so vedotpatti refers to the origin of Ayurveda. Here utpatti means its manifestation, not the coming into existence of something previously nonexistent. An adhyaya is a chapter in which its subjects are studied. Vyakhyasyamah expresses the undertaking to explain; the prefixes are interpreted either as indicating particularity and comprehensiveness or, alternatively, varied treatment and direct address. Yathovacha means 'as he taught.' Bhagavan is explained through lordship, greatness, fame, prosperity, and other excellences; alternative explanations stress exceptional knowledge and personal distinction, or eightfold lordship. Although the introductory promise is written at the chapter's beginning, one interpretation places it in the teaching sequence after the words 'vatsa Sushruta.' Others read it after 'adhyapyash cha bhavanto vatsah'; Gayi rejects that placement. The commentator also records the variant wording 'vedotpattim namadhyayam.'

Key terms

वेदोत्पत्तिम् (vedotpattim)
Origin of the Veda; the commentary supplies ayus and interprets this as the manifestation of Ayurveda.
प्रतिसंस्कर्तृसूत्रम् (pratisaṃskartṛsūtram)
A statement attributed to the reviser of the treatise.
एकीयसूत्रं (ekīyasūtraṃ)
A statement presenting the view of certain authorities.
अभिव्यक्तिः (abhivyaktiḥ)
Manifestation or becoming explicit, the commentary's meaning of utpatti here.
अध्यायः (adhyāyaḥ)
A chapter in which particular subjects are studied.

Adhikarana ੩ (੩) · Śloka ੩

ਅਥ ਖਲੁ ਭਗਵਨ੍ਤਮਮਰਵਰਮਸਿਗਣਪਰਿਵਤਮਾਸ਼੍ਰਮਸ੍ਥਂ ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਂ ਦਿਵੋਦਾਸਂ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਮੌਪਧੇਨਵਵੈਤਰਣੌਰਭ੍ਰਪੌਸ੍ਕਲਾਵਤਕਰਵੀਰ੍ਯ(ਰ)ਗੋਪੁਰਰਕ੍ਸਿਤਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਪ੍ਰਭਤਯ ਊਚੁਃ ||੩||

View original

अथ खलु भगवन्तममरवरमृषिगणपरिवृतमाश्रमस्थं काशिराजं दिवोदासं धन्वन्तरिमौपधेनववैतरणौरभ्रपौष्कलावतकरवीर्य(र)गोपुररक्षितसुश्रुतप्रभृतय ऊचुः ||३||

Meaning of the śloka

Then Aupadhenava, Vaitarana, Aurabhra, Paushkalavata, the disciple whose name is given with the variant karavirya(ra), Gopurarakshita, Sushruta, and others addressed the revered Dhanvantari, Divodasa, king of Kashi. He was dwelling in an ashrama, surrounded by a company of rishis, and is described as foremost among the immortals.

0:000:00
Show commentary

ਅਥ ਖਲ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਅਥੇਤਿ ਮਙ੍ਗਲਾਰ੍ਥਃ, ਤਤ੍ਤੁ ਸ਼੍ਰੋਤਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤ੍ਰੋਃ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਫਲਸਿਦ੍ਧਿਂ ਕਥਯਤਿ| ਖਲੁ ਵਾਕ੍ਯਸ਼ੋਭਾਰ੍ਥਃ, ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਨਿਸ਼੍ਚਯਾਰ੍ਥਃ| ਅਮਰਵਰਂ ਦੇਵਸ਼੍ਰੇਸ੍ਠਂ, ਪੂਰ੍ਵਜਨ੍ਮਨ੍ਯਮਤੋਦ੍ਧਰਣਾਤ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਣੋਵਤਾਰਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਸਿਗਣਪਰਿਵਤਂ ਦੇਵਰ੍ਸਿਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਰ੍ਸਿਰਾਜਰ੍ਸਿਸਮੂਹੈਰ੍ਵੇਸ੍ਟਿਤਂ, ਤਪੋਜ੍ਞਾਨਬਾਹੁਲ੍ਯਾਦੁਪਾਦੇਯਵਾਕ੍ਯਤ੍ਵਾਚ੍ਚ| ਆਸ਼੍ਰਮਸ੍ਥਂ ਵਾਨਪ੍ਰਸ੍ਥਾਸ਼੍ਰਮਸ੍ਥਮ੍, ਏਤੇਨ ਰਾਜ੍ਯਚਿਨ੍ਤਾਪਰਿਤ੍ਯਾਗਾਦਨਾਕੁਲਚਿਤ੍ਤਤ੍ਵਂ ਰਾਜਰ੍ਸਿਤ੍ਵਂ ਚ ਸੂਚਿਤਮ੍| ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਂ ਵਾਰਾਣਸੀਜਨਪਦਨਪਤਿਂ, ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਸ੍ਯ ਨਿਰ੍ਵਾਣਪਦਾਭਿਲਾਸਿਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ਤਤ੍ਪੁਤ੍ਰਤ੍ਵਮਾਪਨ੍ਨਮਿਤਿ ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਮ੍| ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਾਨਾਮਨੇਕਤ੍ਵਾਦ੍ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਣਮਾਹ- ਦਿਵੋਦਾਸਮ੍|- ਦਿਵਿਤਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨਾਤ੍ਰ ਤਤ੍ਸ੍ਥਾਨਦੇਵਾਃ ਕਥ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ, ਤੈਃ ਪੂਜਾਕਾਮ੍ਯਯਾ ਸਮ੍ਪ੍ਰਦੀਯਤੇ ਯਸ੍ਮੈ ਸ ਦਿਵੋਦਾਸਸ੍ਤਮ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਦਾਸ(ਸ਼)ਤਿ ਕਰ੍ਮਾਣਿ ਯਤ੍ਨੇਨ ਕਰੋਤੀਤਿ ਦਾਸਃ(ਸ਼ਃ), ਦਿਵਃ ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗਸ੍ਯ ਦਾਸੋ ਦਿਵੋਦਾਸ(ਸ਼)ਸ੍ਤਮ੍| ਸਰ੍ਵਜਨਪ੍ਰਸਿਦ੍ਧਂ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਣਮਾਹ- ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਮਿਤਿ|- ਧਨੁਃ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ, ਤਸ੍ਯ ਅਨ੍ਤਂ ਪਾਰਮ੍ ਇਯਰ੍ਤਿ ਗਚ੍ਛਤੀਤਿ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਃ , ਤਮ੍; ਅਪਰਾ ਵ੍ਯੁਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਰ੍ਵਿਸ੍ਤਰਭਯਾਨ੍ਨ ਲਿਖਿਤਾ| ਔਪਧੇਨਵਾਦਯਃ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਾਨ੍ਤਾਃ ਸਪ੍ਤ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਾ ਊਚੁਃ ਉਕ੍ਤਵਨ੍ਤਃ| ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਭੋਜਾਦਯਃ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ‘ਗੋਪੁਰਰਕ੍ਸਿਤੌ’ ਇਤਿ ਨਾਮਦ੍ਵਯਂ ਮਨ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ, ਇਤ੍ਯੌਪਧੇਨਵਾਦਯੋਸ੍ਟੌ; ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਨ੍ਨਿਮਿਕਾਙ੍ਕਾਯਨਗਾਰ੍ਗ੍ਯਗਾਲਵਾਃ; ਏਵਮੇਤਾਨ੍ ਦ੍ਵਾਦਸ਼ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਾਨਾਹੁਃ| ਨਨੁ, ਪ੍ਰਸ਼੍ਨਕਰ੍ਤਤਯਾ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਸ੍ਯ ਮੁਖ੍ਯਤ੍ਵਾਦਾਦਾਵਸ੍ਯ ਨਾਮਗ੍ਰਹਣਮੁਚਿਤਂ ਸ੍ਯਾਤ੍, ਕਥਮੌਪਧੇਨਵਾਦਿਨਾਮਾਨ੍ਯਾਦਾਵੁਕ੍ਤਾਨਿ? ਸਤ੍ਯਂ, ਦੇਵਰ੍ਸਯਸ੍ਤੇ ਰਾਜਰ੍ਸੀਣਾਂ ਪੂਜ੍ਯਾ ਇਤਿ ਨ ਦੋਸਃ||੩||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator takes atha as an auspicious opening, indicating fulfilment of the purpose of both listener and teacher. Khalu is understood either as embellishing the sentence or as expressing certainty. Dhanvantari is called foremost among the immortals because, in one explanation, he brought forth amrita in a previous birth; another explanation understands him as an incarnation of Brahma. These are alternative accounts recorded by the commentary. The surrounding rishis are described as devarshis, brahmarshis, and rajarshis, whose austerity and knowledge make their words worthy of acceptance. Ashramastha is interpreted as dwelling in the vanaprastha stage: freedom from concerns of rulership suggests an untroubled mind and the character of a royal sage. Kashiraja identifies the ruler of the Varanasi region. The commentary also connects this designation with the king's wish for liberation and an account of becoming his son. Divodasa distinguishes him from other kings of Kashi. The commentary offers alternative derivations of this name: one involves the gods, their wish to honour, and giving; another explains dasa or dasha through diligent action and service associated with heaven. Dhanvantari is then derived by taking dhanu to mean Shalyashastra and understanding him as one who has reached its farthest extent. Another derivation is deliberately omitted to avoid excessive length. The commentator initially counts seven named disciples, from Aupadhenava to Sushruta, and understands 'and others' to include Bhoja and others. An alternative divides Gopurarakshitau into two names, giving eight, and includes Nimi, Kankayana, Gargya, and Galava under 'and others,' giving twelve. These counts are preserved as alternatives. Finally, although Sushruta is the principal questioner, the others may be named first because, in this explanation, they are devarshis whom rajarshis honour.

Key terms

अमरवरं (amaravaraṃ)
Foremost among the immortals, an epithet explained in alternative ways by the commentator.
वानप्रस्थाश्रमस्थम् (vānaprasthāśramastham)
Situated in the vanaprastha stage, the commentary's interpretation of dwelling in an ashrama.
शल्यशास्त्रं (śalyaśāstraṃ)
The discipline of Shalya, invoked in the commentary's derivation of Dhanvantari.
प्रभृतिशब्देन (prabhṛtiśabdena)
By the expression 'and others,' which extends the list beyond those expressly named.

Adhikarana ੪ (੪) · Śloka ੪

ਭਗਵਨ੍! ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਮਾਨਸਾਗਨ੍ਤੁਭਿਰ੍ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਭਿਰ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਵੇਦਨਾਭਿਘਾਤੋਪਦ੍ਰੁਤਾਨ੍ ਸਨਾਥਾਨਪ੍ਯਨਾਥਵਦ੍ਵਿਚੇਸ੍ਟਮਾਨਾਨ੍ ਵਿਕ੍ਰੋਸ਼ਤਸ਼੍ਚ ਮਾਨਵਾਨਭਿਸਮੀਕ੍ਸ੍ਯ ਮਨਸਿ ਨਃ ਪੀਡਾ ਭਵਤਿ, ਤੇਸਾਂ ਸੁਖੈਸਿਣਾਂ ਰੋਗੋਪਸ਼ਮਾਰ੍ਥਮਾਤ੍ਮਨਸ਼੍ਚ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਯਾਤ੍ਰਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਹਿਤਹੇਤੋਰਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਂ ਸ਼੍ਰੋਤੁਮਿਚ੍ਛਾਮ ਇਹੋਪਦਿਸ਼੍ਯਮਾਨਮ੍, ਅਤ੍ਰਾਯਤ੍ਤਮੈਹਿਕਮਾਮੁਸ੍ਮਿਕਂ ਚ ਸ਼੍ਰੇਯਃ; ਤਦ੍ਭਗਵਨ੍ਤਮੁਪਪਨ੍ਨਾਃ ਸ੍ਮਃ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਤ੍ਵੇਨੇਤਿ ||੪||

View original

भगवन्! शारीरमानसागन्तुभिर्व्याधिभिर्विविधवेदनाभिघातोपद्रुतान् सनाथानप्यनाथवद्विचेष्टमानान् विक्रोशतश्च मानवानभिसमीक्ष्य मनसि नः पीडा भवति, तेषां सुखैषिणां रोगोपशमार्थमात्मनश्च प्राणयात्रार्थं प्रजाहितहेतोरायुर्वेदं श्रोतुमिच्छाम इहोपदिश्यमानम्, अत्रायत्तमैहिकमामुष्मिकं च श्रेयः; तद्भगवन्तमुपपन्नाः स्मः शिष्यत्वेनेति ||४||

Meaning of the śloka

Revered teacher, seeing people afflicted by bodily, mental, and externally caused disorders, distressed by many kinds of pain and injury, struggling as though helpless despite having people to support them, and crying out, pains our minds. We wish to hear the Ayurveda taught here so that the illnesses of those seeking well-being may be relieved, our own lives may be sustained, and people may benefit. Well-being in this life and beyond depends upon it. Therefore, we have come to you as students.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਸਯਸ੍ਤੇ ਤਂ ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿ ਕਿਮੂਚੁਰਿਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਭਗਵਨ੍ਨਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਭਗਵਨ੍ਨਿਤਿ ਸਮ੍ਬੋਧਨੇ| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾ ਵਾਤਾਦਿਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਾਃ, ਮਾਨਸਾ ਰਜਸ੍ਤਮਃਸਮ੍ਭੂਤਾਃ ਕਾਮਾਦਯਃ, ਆਗਨ੍ਤਵੋ ਵ੍ਯਾਘ੍ਰਾਦਿਕਤਾਃ ਸ਼ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਕਤਾਸ਼੍ਚ| ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਨਾਮਤ੍ਰਾਗ੍ਰਹਣਮਸ੍ਮਿਞ੍ਛਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ ਤਤ੍ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਸ੍ਯਾਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਸੂਚਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍; ਅਥਵਾ ‘ਆਤ੍ਮਨਸ਼੍ਚ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਯਾਤ੍ਰਾਰ੍ਥਂ’ ਇਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰੈਵਾਵਰੋਧਾਚ੍ਚ, ਸੀਣਾਂ ਹਿ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਮਾਨਸਾਗਨ੍ਤੁਵ੍ਯਾਧ੍ਯਸਮ੍ਭਵਾਤ੍ ਕੇਵਲਂ ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਨਿਸੇਧੇਨੈਵ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਯਾਤ੍ਰਾਭਿਪ੍ਰੇਤਾ| ਉਪਦ੍ਰੁਤਾਨ੍ ਉਪਸਸ੍ਟਾਨ੍| ਸਨਾਥਾਨਪਿ ਸਮਿਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਕਾਨਪਿ| ਅਨਾਥਵਤ੍ ਏਕਾਕਿਜਨਵਤ੍| ਵਿਚੇਸ੍ਟਮਾਨਾਨ੍ ਵਿਰੁਦ੍ਧਾਂ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਂ ਕੁਰ੍ਵਾਣਾਨ੍| ਏਤੇਨਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਂ ਵਿਨਾ ਮਿਤ੍ਰਾਦਯੋਪ੍ਯਨਰ੍ਥਕਾ ਇਤਿ| ਵਿਕ੍ਰੋਸ਼ਤਸ਼੍ਚ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਾਦਾਰ੍ਤਸ੍ਵਰੈ ਰੁਦਤਸ਼੍ਚ| ਨਃ ਅਸ੍ਮਾਕਮ੍| ਆਤ੍ਮਨਸ਼੍ਚ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਯਾਤ੍ਰਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਾਨਾਮਗ੍ਨੀਸੋਮਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਯਾਤ੍ਰਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਵ੍ਯਵਹਾਰਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਵਤ੍ਤਾਨੁਵਰ੍ਤਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍| ਅਤ੍ਰ ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ‘ਆਤ੍ਮਪ੍ਰਜਾਹਿਤਹੇਤੋਃ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ| ਉਪਦਿਸ਼੍ਯਮਾਨਂ ਸਙ੍ਕ੍ਸੇਪਤਃ ਕਥ੍ਯਮਾਨਮ੍| ਅਤ੍ਰਾਯਤ੍ਤਮਿਤਿ ਅਤ੍ਰਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦੋਪਦੇਸ਼ੇ, ਆਯਤ੍ਤਂ ਅਧੀਨਮ੍| ਐਹਿਕਮ੍ ਇਹਲੋਕਭਵਮ੍, ਆਮੁਸ੍ਮਿਕਂ ਪਰਲੋਕਭਵਂ, ਸ਼੍ਰੇਯਃ ਕਲ੍ਯਾਣਲਾਭਃ| ਅਰ੍ਥਕਾਮੌ ਮਿਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਲਾਭੋ ਯਸ਼ਸ਼੍ਚ ਐਹਿਕਂ ਸ਼੍ਰੇਯਃ; ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗਾਦਿ ਵਿਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਟਂ ਜਨ੍ਮਾਨ੍ਤਰਜ੍ਞਾਨਾਦਯਸ਼੍ਚ ਆਮੁਸ੍ਮਿਕਂ ਸ਼੍ਰੇਯਃ, ਅਮਰਤ੍ਵਂ ਚ| ਤਦਿਤਿ ਹੇਤੌ, ਯਸ੍ਮਾਦਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦੋਪਦੇਸ਼ਾਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਂ ਸ਼੍ਰੇਯ ਆਯਤ੍ਤਂ, ਤਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍; ਉਪਪਨ੍ਨਾਃ ਸ੍ਮਃ ਸਮੀਪਮਾਗਤਾਃ ਸ੍ਮਃ; ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਤ੍ਵੇਨ ਛਾਤ੍ਰਭਾਵੇਨੇਤਿ||੪||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator explains bodily disorders as arising from imbalance of Vata and the other doshas; mental disorders as desire and related disturbances arising from rajas and tamas; and externally caused disorders as those produced by such causes as tigers or weapons. He offers two explanations for the absence of svabhavika disorders from the opening list. One is that their management is not the principal subject of this treatise. The other is that they are already included in the students' wish to sustain their own lives. In that second explanation, the rishis are regarded as not subject to the other three groups, so sustaining life concerns preventing natural disturbances. This is the commentator's account of the rishis. People described as sanatha have friends and others to support them, yet suffer as if alone. Their troubled actions and anguished cries show, in this explanation, that companions alone cannot provide the help that Ayurveda supplies. Pranayatra is explained as maintaining the functioning of the pranas, including Agni and Soma, and following svasthavritta. The commentator records the alternative reading 'atmaprajahitahetoh,' referring to benefit for oneself and others. Upadishyamana means being taught concisely. The commentary distinguishes well-being in this world from well-being beyond it. The former includes artha and kama, gaining friends, and fame. The latter includes heaven, knowledge connected with other births, and immortality. These are the traditional aims stated in the commentary, not promises of medical outcomes. Because these kinds of welfare are understood to depend on this instruction, the speakers have approached the teacher in the capacity of students.

Key terms

आगन्तवो (āgantavo)
Externally caused disorders, illustrated here by injury from animals or weapons.
रजस्तमःसम्भूताः (rajastamaḥsambhūtāḥ)
Arising from rajas and tamas, as the commentary describes the mental disturbances.
स्वाभाविकानाम् (svābhāvikānām)
Of natural disorders, whose omission from the opening list receives two explanations.
प्राणयात्रार्थं (prāṇayātrārthaṃ)
For sustaining life and its functions.
स्वस्थवृत्तानुवर्तनार्थम् (svasthavṛttānuvartanārtham)
For following the regimen that maintains well-being.
ऐहिकम् (aihikam)
Pertaining to this life or world.
आमुष्मिकं (āmuṣmikaṃ)
Pertaining to the world or existence beyond this life.

Adhikarana ੫ (੫) · Śloka ੫

ਤਾਨੁਵਾਚ ਭਗਵਾਨ੍- ਸ੍ਵਾਗਤਂ ਵਃ; ਸਰ੍ਵ ਏਵਾਮੀਮਾਂਸ੍ਯਾ ਅਧ੍ਯਾਪ੍ਯਾਸ਼੍ਚ ਭਵਨ੍ਤੋ ਵਤ੍ਸਾਃ ||੫||

View original

तानुवाच भगवान्- स्वागतं वः; सर्व एवामीमांस्या अध्याप्याश्च भवन्तो वत्साः ||५||

Meaning of the śloka

The revered teacher said to them: 'Welcome, dear children. All of you are fit to be taught, and your suitability needs no further examination.'

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਤੇਸਾਮੌਪਧੇਨਵਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਸਮੀਪਗਤਾਨਾਂ ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜੇਨ ਕਿਂ ਕਤਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਤਾਨੁਵਾਚ ਭਗਵਾਨਿਤਿ| ਸ੍ਵਾਗਤਂ ਸ਼ੋਭਨਮਾਗਤਂ, ਵਃ ਯੁਸ੍ਮਾਕਮ੍| ਅਮੀਮਾਂਸ੍ਯਾਃ ਅਵਿਚਾਰਣੀਯਾਃ, ਪ੍ਰਸਿਦ੍ਧਜਾਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਵਤ੍ਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਅਧ੍ਯਾਪ੍ਯਾਸ਼੍ਚ ਅਧ੍ਯਾਪਨਾਰ੍ਹਾਸ਼੍ਚ| ਵਤ੍ਸਾ ਇਤਿ ਪਕ੍ਸਪਾਤਾਤਿਸ਼ਯਤ੍ਵਸੂਚਕਂ ਸਮ੍ਬੋਧਨਮ੍; ਅਥਵਾ ਵਤ੍ਸਾਃ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਵਯਸੋ ਗਵਾਂ ਪੁਤ੍ਰਾਃ, ਵਤ੍ਸਾ ਇਵ ਵਤ੍ਸਾਃ; ਅਨੇਨ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਣੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਵਯਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਂ ਪੁਤ੍ਰਸਾਦਸ਼੍ਯਂ ਦਮਨੀਯਤ੍ਵਂ ਚ ਸੂਚਯਤਿ||੫||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentary explains this as the king of Kashi's response to Aupadhenava and the others who had approached him. Svagatam expresses that their coming is welcome. Amimamsyah means that further examination of their suitability is unnecessary because their jati and related qualifications are already known. Adhyapyah means worthy of receiving instruction. Vatsah is explained first as an affectionate address showing particular fondness. An alternative explanation starts from its literal meaning, young calves: by comparing the students to calves, the address suggests their youth, their likeness to sons, and their capacity to be trained or disciplined.

Key terms

स्वागतं (svāgataṃ)
A welcome expressing that their arrival is good.
अमीमांस्याः (amīmāṃsyāḥ)
Not requiring further examination of their suitability for instruction.
अध्यापनार्हाश्च (adhyāpanārhāś ca)
Worthy of being taught.
वत्साः (vatsāḥ)
An affectionate address to the students; alternatively explained through the image of young calves.

Adhikarana ੬ (੬) · Śloka ੬

ਇਹ ਖਲ੍ਵਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਂ ਨਾਮੋਪਾਙ੍ਗਮਥਰ੍ਵਵੇਦਸ੍ਯਾਨੁਤ੍ਪਾਦ੍ਯੈਵ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਃ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕਸ਼ਤਸਹਸ੍ਰਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸਹਸ੍ਰਂ ਚ ਕਤਵਾਨ੍ ਸ੍ਵਯਮ੍ਭੂਃ, ਤਤੋਲ੍ਪਾਯੁਸ੍ਟ੍ਵਮਲ੍ਪਮੇਧਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਂ ਚਾਲੋਕ੍ਯ ਨਰਾਣਾਂ ਭੂਯੋਸ੍ਟਧਾ ਪ੍ਰਣੀਤਵਾਨ੍ ||੬||

View original

इह खल्वायुर्वेदं नामोपाङ्गमथर्ववेदस्यानुत्पाद्यैव प्रजाः श्लोकशतसहस्रमध्यायसहस्रं च कृतवान् स्वयम्भूः, ततोऽल्पायुष्ट्वमल्पमेधस्त्वं चालोक्य नराणां भूयोऽष्टधा प्रणीतवान् ||६||

Meaning of the śloka

According to this account, before creating living beings, Svayambhu set out Ayurveda, an upanga of the Atharvaveda, in one hundred thousand verses and one thousand chapters. Later, observing the shorter lifespan and limited understanding of human beings, he arranged it again in eight divisions.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਮਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਸ੍ਯ ਸਾਮਾਨ੍ਯਂ ਲਕ੍ਸਣਂ ਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਇਹ ਖਲ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਇਹ ਖਲ੍ਵਿਤਿ ਵਾਕ੍ਯਾਲਙ੍ਕਾਰੇ, ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਮਾਣਂ ਵਾਕ੍ਯਮਲਙ੍ਕਰੋਤਿ; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਇਹ ਮਯਿ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਕਾਰੇ, ਖਲੁ ਏਵਾਰ੍ਥਃ; ਏਤੇਨ ਮਯ੍ਯੇਵ ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦੋਸ੍ਟਾਙ੍ਗੋ ਨਾਨ੍ਯੇਸੁ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਕਾਰੇਸੁ, ਅਨ੍ਯੇਸਾਮੇਕੈਕਸ੍ਯੈਵਾਙ੍ਗਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਣੇਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਇਹੇਤਿ ਵਾਕ੍ਯੋਪਕ੍ਰਮੇ, ਖਲੁ ਸਮ੍ਬੋਧਨੇ, ਇਤ੍ਯਪਰੇ| ਉਪਾਙ੍ਗਮ੍ ਅਙ੍ਗਮੇਵਾਲ੍ਪਤ੍ਵਾਦੁਪਾਙ੍ਗਂ; ਤਦ੍ਯਥਾ- ਦੇਹਸ੍ਯ ਬਾਹੁਜਙ੍ਘੇ ਸ਼ਿਰ ਇਤ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਾਨਿ, ਕਰਚਰਣਨਾਸਿਕਾਦੀਨ੍ਯੁਪਾਙ੍ਗਾਨਿ, ਏਤੇਨੋਪਾਙ੍ਗਮਿਤ੍ਯੁਕ੍ਤਮ੍; ਉਪਾਙ੍ਗਮਙ੍ਗਸਮੀਪਮਿਤ੍ਯੇਕੇ| ਅਨੁਤ੍ਪਾਦ੍ਯੈਵ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਃ ਲੋਕਸਸ੍ਟੇਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਕ੍, ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਂ ਪ੍ਰਦਰ੍ਸ਼੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਃ ਪਸ਼੍ਚਾਤ੍ ਸਸ੍ਟਵਾਨਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਕਤਵਾਨ੍ ਸਂਸ੍ਕਤਵਾਨ੍, ਨ ਤੁ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਮੁਤ੍ਪਾਦਿਤਵਾਨ੍; ਕੁਤਃ? ਨਿਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਸ੍ਵਯਮ੍ਭੂਃ ਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਾ| ਤਤੋਲ੍ਪਾਯੁਸ੍ਟ੍ਵਮਿਤਿ ਤਤਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਕ੍ਤਨਕਰਣਾਦਨਨ੍ਤਰਮਧਰ੍ਮਪ੍ਰਵਤ੍ਤੌ ਸਤ੍ਯਾਮ੍, ਅਲ੍ਪਾਯੁਸ੍ਟ੍ਵਮ੍ ਅਲ੍ਪਜੀਵਿਤਤ੍ਵਮ੍, ਅਲ੍ਪਮੇਧਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਂ ਸ੍ਵਲ੍ਪਬੁਦ੍ਧਿਤ੍ਵਂ, ਭੂਯਃ ਪੁਨਃ, ਅਸ੍ਟਧਾ ਅਸ੍ਟਭਿਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰੈਃ||੬||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator offers several readings of the opening words. Iha khalu may simply introduce and ornament the statement. Alternatively, iha means 'in me, the composer of these sutras,' and khalu gives emphasis: the complete eight-branched Ayurveda is presented here, whereas other composers treat individual branches. A third reading makes iha an opening expression and khalu an address to the listener. Upanga is explained as a smaller constituent part, by analogy with hands, feet, and nose in relation to larger bodily parts; another view takes it as something situated near an anga. The statement places the presentation of Ayurveda before the creation of living beings. Kritavan is interpreted as arranging or refining what already exists, rather than producing it for the first time, because Ayurveda is regarded here as eternal. Svayambhu is identified as Brahma. The subsequent shortening of lifespan and reduction of understanding are associated in this account with the rise of adharma after the earlier arrangement. Bhuyah means 'again,' and ashtadha means 'in eight ways.'

Key terms

उपाङ्गम् (upāṅgam)
A smaller constituent or subsidiary part; alternatively, something near an anga.
स्वयम्भूः (svayambhūḥ)
The self-existent one, identified by the commentary as Brahma.
अष्टधा (aṣṭadhā)
In eight divisions or ways.

Adhikarana ੭ (੭) · Śloka ੭

ਤਦ੍ਯਥਾ- ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਂ, ਸ਼ਾਲਾਕ੍ਯਂ, ਕਾਯਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾ, ਭੂਤਵਿਦ੍ਯਾ, ਕੌਮਾਰਭਤ੍ਯਮ੍, ਅਗਦਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ, ਰਸਾਯਨਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ, ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਿਤਿ ||੭||

View original

तद्यथा- शल्यं, शालाक्यं, कायचिकित्सा, भूतविद्या, कौमारभृत्यम्, अगदतन्त्रं, रसायनतन्त्रं, वाजीकरणतन्त्रमिति ||७||

Meaning of the śloka

These eight divisions are Shalya, Shalakya, Kayachikitsa, Bhutavidya, Kaumarabhritya, Agadatantra, Rasayanatantra, and Vajikaranatantra.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਥ ਕੇ ਤੇਸ੍ਟੌ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਾਃ? ਇਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਤਦ੍ਯਥੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਮਿਤਿ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਾਹਰਣਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਂ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮ੍| ਸ਼ਲਾਕਾਯਾਃ ਕਰ੍ਮ ਸ਼ਾਲਾਕ੍ਯਂ, ਤਤ੍ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਂ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਪਿ ਸ਼ਾਲਾਕ੍ਯਮ੍| ਕਾਯੋਤ੍ਰਾਗ੍ਨਿਰੁਚ੍ਯਤੇ, ਤਸ੍ਯ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾ ਕਾਯਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾ; ਅਥਵਾ ਕਾਯੋ ਦੇਹਃ, ਤਸ੍ਯ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾ ਕਾਯਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾ| ਭੂਤਾਨਿ ਦੇਵਾਸੁਰਗਨ੍ਧਰ੍ਵਯਕ੍ਸਰਕ੍ਸਃਪਿਤਨਾਗਪਿਸ਼ਾਚਾ ਅਸ੍ਟੌ, ਤਾਨਿ ਵੇਤ੍ਤ੍ਯਨਯੇਤਿ ਭੂਤਵਿਦ੍ਯਾ; ਅਥਵਾ ਭੂਤਾਵੇਸ਼ਾਪਾਕਰਣਾਰ੍ਥਾ ਵਿਦ੍ਯਾ ਭੂਤਵਿਦ੍ਯਾ| ਕੁਮਾਰਾਃ ਬਾਲਾਃ, ਤੇਸਾਂ ਭਤਿਰ੍ਧਾਰਣਂ ਪੋਸਣਂ ਚ, ਤਸ੍ਯਾ ਭਤ੍ਯਾ ਇਦਂ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਿਤਿ ਕੌਮਾਰਭਤ੍ਯਮ੍| ਅਗਦੋ ਵਿਸਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਃ, ਤਦਰ੍ਥਂ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਗਦਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਵਿਸਗਰਵੈਰੋਧਿਕਸਮ੍ਪ੍ਰਯੋਗੋ ਗਦਃ, ਗਦਸ੍ਯਾਭਾਵਃ ਅਗਦਃ, ਅਗਦਾਯ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਗਦਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਚਕ੍ਸਤੇ| ਰਸਾਨਾਂ ਰਸਰਕ੍ਤਾਦੀਨਾਮਯਨਮਾਪ੍ਯਾਯਨਂ ਰਸਾਯਨਂ, ਤਦਰ੍ਥਂ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਰਸਾਯਨਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮ੍; ਅਥਵਾ ਰਸਾਨਾਂ ਰਸਵੀਰ੍ਯਵਿਪਾਕਾਦੀਨਾਮਾਯੁਃਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਕਾਰਣਾਨਾਮਯਨਂ ਵਿਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਟਲਾਭੋਪਾਯੋ ਰਸਾਯਨਂ, ਤਦਰ੍ਥਂ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਰਸਾਯਨਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮ੍| ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਿਤਿ ਯੇਨ ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੀਸੁ ਵਿਸਯੇ ਵਾਜੀਵ ਨਰਃ ਸਾਮਰ੍ਥ੍ਯਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਨੋਤਿ ਤਦ੍ ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਂ, ਯੇਨਾਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਂ ਵ੍ਯਜ੍ਯਤੇ ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੀਸੁ ਤਦ੍ ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਮ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਵਜਨਂ ਵਾਜੋ ਵੇਗਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਰਣਾਚ੍ਛੁਕ੍ਰਸ੍ਯ , ਸ ਵਿਦ੍ਯਤੇ ਯੇਸਾਂ ਤੇ ਵਾਜਿਨਃ, ਅਵਾਜਿਨੋ ਵਾਜਿਨਃ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਨ੍ਤੇਨੇਨੇਤਿ ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਮ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਵਾਜੀਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਮਭਿਧੀਯਤੇ, ਤੇਨ ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਰਹਿਤਸ੍ਯ ਵਾਜੀ ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਂ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇਨੇਨੇਤਿ ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਂ, ਤਦਰ੍ਥਂ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮ੍| ਇਤਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋਸ੍ਟਾਙ੍ਗਪਰਿਸਮਾਪ੍ਤੌ||੭||

Meaning of the commentary

Shalyatantra is the branch chiefly concerned with removing shalya. Shalakya takes its name from work performed with a shalaka. Kayachikitsa is explained in two ways: treatment of agni, which kaya is taken to denote here, or treatment of the body. Bhutavidya is knowledge concerning eight classes of beings—devas, asuras, gandharvas, yakshas, rakshasas, pitris, nagas, and pishachas—or, alternatively, knowledge directed towards removing bhuta possession. Kaumarabhritya concerns the sustaining and nourishing of children. Agadatantra concerns counteracting poison. Another explanation understands gada as poison, gara, and harmful incompatible combinations, and agada as their absence; the branch aims at that freedom from harm. Rasayana is explained either as nourishing rasa, rakta, and the other bodily constituents, or as a means of obtaining particular benefits from rasa, virya, vipaka, and related factors associated with longevity and other aims. Vajikarana is described through several derivations. One compares a man's sexual capacity with that of a stallion; another relates the term to pronounced sexual expression. Other views connect vaja with the movement or force of shukra, or understand vaji itself as shukra, so that vajikarana produces or restores that capacity where it is absent. These derivations are alternatives, not a single definition. The closing iti marks the end of the eightfold list.

Key terms

कायचिकित्सा (kāyacikitsā)
Treatment of kaya, interpreted here either as agni or as the body.
भूतविद्या (bhūtavidyā)
Knowledge concerning the listed beings, or the removal of possession attributed to them.
कौमारभृत्यम् (kaumārabhṛtyam)
The branch concerned with sustaining and nourishing children.
रसायनं (rasāyanaṃ)
Nourishment of bodily constituents, or a means of obtaining benefits through rasa and related factors, in the alternative explanations.
वाजीकरणम् (vājīkaraṇam)
The branch explained through sexual capacity and shukra in several alternative derivations.

Adhikarana ੮ (੮) · Śloka ੮

ਅਥਾਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਲਕ੍ਸਣਸਮਾਸਃ |੮|

View original

अथास्य प्रत्यङ्गलक्षणसमासः |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Next comes a brief account of the defining features of each branch of Ayurveda.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਥੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਅਥੇਤ੍ਯਾਨਨ੍ਤਰ੍ਯੇ, ਅਸ੍ਯ ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਸ੍ਯ, ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਲਕ੍ਸਣਸਮਾਸਃ ਏਕਮੇਕਮਙ੍ਗਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿ ਲਕ੍ਸਣਸਙ੍ਕ੍ਸੇਪਃ|੮|-

Meaning of the commentary

Atha indicates what follows next. Asya refers to Ayurveda. Pratyanga-lakshana-samasa means a concise statement of the defining features of each individual branch.

Key terms

प्रत्यङ्गलक्षणसमासः (pratyaṅgalakṣaṇasamāsaḥ)
A concise account of the defining features of each branch.

Adhikarana ੯ (੮(੧)) · Śloka ੮

ਤਤ੍ਰ, ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਂ ਨਾਮ ਵਿਵਿਧਤਣਕਾਸ੍ਠਪਾਸਾਣਪਾਂਸ਼ੁਲੋਹਲੋਸ੍ਟਾਸ੍ਥਿਬਾਲਨਖਪੂਯਾਸ੍ਰਾਵਦੁਸ੍ਟਵ੍ਰਣਾਨ੍ਤਰ੍ਗਰ੍ਭਸ਼ਲ੍ਯੋਦ੍ਧਰਣਾਰ੍ਥਂ , ਯਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸ਼ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਕ੍ਸਾਰਾਗ੍ਨਿਪ੍ਰਣਿਧਾਨਵ੍ਰਣਵਿਨਿਸ਼੍ਚਯਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਚ (੧) |੮|

View original

तत्र, शल्यं नाम विविधतृणकाष्ठपाषाणपांशुलोहलोष्टास्थिबालनखपूयास्रावदुष्टव्रणान्तर्गर्भशल्योद्धरणार्थं , यन्त्रशस्त्रक्षाराग्निप्रणिधानव्रणविनिश्चयार्थं च (१) |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Shalya is the branch concerned with removing shalya, including grass, wood, stone, dust, metal, clods, bone, hair, nails, pus, and discharge from diseased wounds, and with removal of a fetus when it constitutes a shalya. It also concerns the application of yantra, shastra, kshara, and agni, and the assessment of wounds.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਕਿਂ ਤਦੇਕਮੇਕਮਙ੍ਗਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿ ਲਕ੍ਸਣਂ ਸਙ੍ਕ੍ਸੇਪੇਣੇਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਤਤ੍ਰੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਤੇਸ੍ਵਙ੍ਗੇਸੁ| ਨਾਮਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਨੇ, ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦ੍ਯਤੇ ਕਥ੍ਯਤ ਇਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਵਿਵਿਧਤਣਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਪੂਯਾਸ੍ਰਾਵਾਨ੍ਤਾਨਾਂ ਦੁਸ੍ਟਵ੍ਰਣਸ੍ਯਾਨ੍ਤਰ੍ਮਧ੍ਯਾਦੁਦ੍ਧਰਣਾਰ੍ਥਮੁਦ੍ਧਰਣਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਂ, ਤਥਾ ਗਰ੍ਭਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਸ੍ਯਾਪਿ| ਉਦ੍ਧਰਣਾਰ੍ਥਮਿਤ੍ਯਸ੍ਯਾਗ੍ਰੇ ‘ਸਸ੍ਟ੍ਯਾ ਵਿਧਾਨੈਃ’ ਇਤਿ ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ, ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਯਨ੍ਤਿ ਚ- ਅਪਤਰ੍ਪਣਾਦ੍ਯੈ ਰਕ੍ਸਾਵਿਧਾਨਾਨ੍ਤੈਰ੍ਦ੍ਵਿਵ੍ਰਣੀਯੋਕ੍ਤੈਰਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਪ੍ਰਣਿਧਾਨਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਨਿਵੇਸ਼ਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍| ਨ ਕੇਵਲਂ ਕਾਸ੍ਠਤਣਾਦਿ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਂ, ਕਿਨ੍ਤੁ ‘‘ਅਤਿਪ੍ਰਵਦ੍ਧਂ ਮਲਦੋਸਜਂ ਵਾ ਸ਼ਰੀਰਿਣਾਂ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਾਨਾਮ੍| ਯਤ੍ਕਿਞ੍ਚਿਦਾਬਾਧਕਰਂ ਸ਼ਰੀਰੇ ਤਤ੍ ਸਰ੍ਵਮੇਵ ਪ੍ਰਵਦਨ੍ਤਿ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਮ੍’’- ਇਤਿ||੮(੧)||

Meaning of the commentary

Tatra refers to the eight branches, and nama introduces what is being defined. The commentator connects the listed materials, through pus and discharge, with their removal from within a dushta vrana; removal of a garbha-shalya is included as well. Some read the additional words 'by sixty procedures,' which they explain as the measures from apatarpana through protective arrangements described in the Dvivraniya chapter. Pranidhana means placing or applying the relevant means. The commentary broadens shalya beyond pieces of wood or grass. Its cited verse calls anything that causes affliction within the body a shalya, including something excessively increased or arising from mala or dosha, and applies this description to bodies of both stationary and moving living beings.

Key terms

शल्यं (śalyaṃ)
An afflicting object or factor in the body; not restricted here to an external splinter.
दुष्टव्रणस्य (duṣṭavraṇasya)
Of an unhealthy or disordered wound from which the listed matter is to be removed.
गर्भशल्यस्यापि (garbhaśalyasyāpi)
Also of a fetus considered a shalya requiring removal in this context.
प्रणिधानार्थं (praṇidhānārthaṃ)
For placing or applying the specified therapeutic means.

Adhikarana ੧੦ (੮(੨)) · Śloka ੮

ਸ਼ਾਲਾਕ੍ਯਂ ਨਾਮੋਰ੍ਧ੍ਵਜਤ੍ਰੁਗਤਾਨਾਂ ਸ਼੍ਰਵਣਨਯਨਵਦਨਘ੍ਰਾਣਾਦਿਸਂਸ਼੍ਰਿਤਾਨਾਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਧੀਨਾਮੁਪਸ਼ਮਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍ (੨) |੮|

View original

शालाक्यं नामोर्ध्वजत्रुगतानां श्रवणनयनवदनघ्राणादिसंश्रितानां व्याधीनामुपशमनार्थम् (२) |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Shalakya is the branch concerned with relieving disorders situated above the jatru, including those affecting the ears, eyes, mouth, nose, and related regions.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਸ਼ਾਲਾਕ੍ਯਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਜਤ੍ਰੁ ਗ੍ਰੀਵਾਮੂਲਮ੍, ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਵਕ੍ਸੋਂਸਸਨ੍ਧਿਮਾਹੁਃ| ਵਦਨਮਤ੍ਰ ਮੁਖਕੁਹਰਮਾਹੁਃ| ਘ੍ਰਾਣਾਦਿਸਂਸ਼੍ਰਿਤਾਨਾਮਿਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ਆਦਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਾਚ੍ਛਿਰਃਕਪਾਲਾਦਿਸਂਸ਼੍ਰਿਤਾਨਾਮ੍||੮(੨)||

Meaning of the commentary

Jatru is explained as the root of the neck; another view places it at the junction of the chest and shoulder. Vadana here means the cavity of the mouth. The word 'and others' after the nose includes the head, skull, and related sites.

Key terms

शालाक्यं (śālākyaṃ)
The branch dealing with the specified disorders above the jatru.
जत्रु (jatru)
The root of the neck, or, in another interpretation, the chest–shoulder junction.
वदनम् (vadanam)
The mouth cavity in this passage.

Adhikarana ੧੧ (੮(੩)) · Śloka ੮

ਕਾਯਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾ ਨਾਮ ਸਰ੍ਵਾਙ੍ਗਸਂਸ਼੍ਰਿਤਾਨਾਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਧੀਨਾਂ ਜ੍ਵਰਰਕ੍ਤਪਿਤ੍ਤਸ਼ੋਸੋਨ੍ਮਾਦਾਪਸ੍ਮਾਰਕੁਸ੍ਠਮੇਹਾਤਿਸਾਰਾਦੀਨਾਮੁਪਸ਼ਮਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍ (੩) |੮|

View original

कायचिकित्सा नाम सर्वाङ्गसंश्रितानां व्याधीनां ज्वररक्तपित्तशोषोन्मादापस्मारकुष्ठमेहातिसारादीनामुपशमनार्थम् (३) |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Kayachikitsa is the branch concerned with relieving disorders affecting the body as a whole, including jvara, raktapitta, shosha, unmada, apasmara, kushtha, meha, atisara, and others.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਕਾਯਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਕੇਚਿਜ੍ਜ੍ਵਰਾਨਨ੍ਤਰਮਤਿਸਾਰਂ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਨ੍ਨ, ਪਞ੍ਜਿਕਯਾ ਦੂਸਿਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍||੮(੩)||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator notes that some versions place atisara immediately after jvara in the list. He rejects that reading because it has been criticised in the Panjika commentary.

Key terms

कायचिकित्सा (kāyacikitsā)
The branch addressing the listed disorders affecting the body as a whole.
सर्वाङ्गसंश्रितानां (sarvāṅgasaṃśritānāṃ)
Of disorders involving the body as a whole.

Adhikarana ੧੨ (੮(੪)) · Śloka ੮

ਭੂਤਵਿਦ੍ਯਾ ਨਾਮ ਦੇਵਾਸੁਰਗਨ੍ਧਰ੍ਵਯਕ੍ਸਰਕ੍ਸਃਪਿਤਪਿਸ਼ਾਚਨਾਗਗ੍ਰਹਾਦ੍ਯੁਪਸਸ੍ਟਚੇਤਸਾਂ ਸ਼ਾਨ੍ਤਿਕਰ੍ਮਬਲਿਹਰਣਾਦਿਗ੍ਰਹੋਪਸ਼ਮਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍ (੪) |੮|

View original

भूतविद्या नाम देवासुरगन्धर्वयक्षरक्षःपितृपिशाचनागग्रहाद्युपसृष्टचेतसां शान्तिकर्मबलिहरणादिग्रहोपशमनार्थम् (४) |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Bhutavidya concerns pacifying the grahas described as devas, asuras, gandharvas, yakshas, rakshasas, pitris, pishachas, nagas, and others when they afflict a person's consciousness. The means named in the passage include shanti rites, offering bali, and related measures.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਭੂਤਵਿਦ੍ਯੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਅਸੁਰਾਃ ਦੈਤ੍ਯਾਃ, ਗਨ੍ਧਰ੍ਵਾ ਦੇਵਗਾਯਕਾਃ, ਯਕ੍ਸਾਃ ਧਨਦਾਦਯਃ, ਰਕ੍ਸਾਂਸਿ ਰਾਵਣਪ੍ਰਭਤੀਨਿ, ਪਿਤਰਃ ਅਗ੍ਨਿਸ੍ਵਾਤ੍ਤਾਦਯਃ, ਪਿਸ਼ਾਚਾਃ ਪਿਸ਼ਿਤਾਸ਼ਨਾਃ; ਏਤੇ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦ੍ ਗ੍ਰਹਾਃ ਪ੍ਰੋਚ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ| ਸ਼ਾਨ੍ਤਿਕਰ੍ਮਬਲਿਹਰਣਾਦਿਗ੍ਰਹੋਪਸ਼ਮਨਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਸ਼ਾਨ੍ਤਿਕਰ੍ਮਾਦਿਭਿਰਸ੍ਟਗ੍ਰਹੋਪਸ਼ਮਨਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਮ੍||੮(੪)||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentary identifies asuras as daityas, gandharvas as divine singers, yakshas as beings such as Dhanada, rakshasas as beings such as Ravana, pitris as those such as the Agnishvattas, and pishachas as flesh-eating beings. They are called grahas because they seize or take hold. The stated purpose of shanti rites, bali offerings, and related measures is to pacify these eight classes of graha. This explanation follows the traditional account supplied in the passage.

Key terms

भूतविद्या (bhūtavidyā)
The branch concerned here with disturbances attributed to the listed grahas.
ग्रहाः (grahāḥ)
Beings called 'seizers' because they are understood to take hold of a person.
शान्तिकर्म (śāntikarma)
Pacifying ritual action named among the measures in this passage.

Adhikarana ੧੩ (੮(੫)) · Śloka ੮

ਕੌਮਾਰਭਤ੍ਯਂ ਨਾਮ ਕੁਮਾਰਭਰਣਧਾਤ੍ਰੀਕ੍ਸੀਰਦੋਸਸਂਸ਼ੋਧਨਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਦੁਸ੍ਟਸ੍ਤਨ੍ਯਗ੍ਰਹਸਮੁਤ੍ਥਾਨਾਂ ਚ ਵ੍ਯਾਧੀਨਾਮੁਪਸ਼ਮਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍ (੫) |੮|

View original

कौमारभृत्यं नाम कुमारभरणधात्रीक्षीरदोषसंशोधनार्थं दुष्टस्तन्यग्रहसमुत्थानां च व्याधीनामुपशमनार्थम् (५) |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Kaumarabhritya concerns the care and nourishment of children, correction of faults in a nursing woman's milk, and relief of disorders arising from disturbed breast milk or from grahas.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਕੌਮਾਰਭਤ੍ਯਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਦੁਸ੍ਟਸ੍ਤਨ੍ਯਗ੍ਰਹਸਮੁਤ੍ਥਾਨਾਂ ਚੇਤਿ ਦੁਸ੍ਟਸ੍ਤਨ੍ਯੇਨ ਦੁਸ੍ਟਗ੍ਰਹੇਣ ਚ ਜਾਤਾਨਾਮਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ; ਤਤ੍ਰ ਦੁਸ੍ਟਸ੍ਤਨ੍ਯੇਨ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਃ, ਦੁਸ੍ਟਗ੍ਰਹੇਣਾਗਨ੍ਤਵਃ||੮(੫)||

Meaning of the commentary

The compound dushta-stanya-graha-samutthana is explained as disorders arising either from disturbed breast milk or from an afflicting graha. The commentary places those arising from the milk in the bodily category and those attributed to a graha in the externally caused category.

Key terms

कौमारभृत्यं (kaumārabhṛtyaṃ)
The branch concerning child care, nourishment, and the disorders specified here.
दुष्टस्तन्येन (duṣṭastanyena)
Through disturbed breast milk, identified here as a cause of bodily disorders.
आगन्तवः (āgantavaḥ)
Externally caused disorders; here the category assigned to disorders attributed to grahas.

Adhikarana ੧੪ (੮(੬)) · Śloka ੮

ਅਗਦਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਨਾਮ ਸਰ੍ਪਕੀਟਲੂਤਾਮੂਸਕਾਦਿਦਸ੍ਟਵਿਸਵ੍ਯਞ੍ਜਨਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਵਿਵਿਧਵਿਸਸਂਯੋਗੋਪਸ਼ਮਨਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਚ (੬) |੮|

View original

अगदतन्त्रं नाम सर्पकीटलूतामूषकादिदष्टविषव्यञ्जनार्थं विविधविषसंयोगोपशमनार्थं च (६) |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Agadatantra concerns recognising the manifestations of poisoning from the bites or stings of snakes, insects, spiders, mice, and similar creatures, and relieving the effects of combinations of various poisons.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਗਦਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਕੀਟਾ ਵਸ਼੍ਚਿਕਾਦਯਃ; ਲੂਤਾ ਮਰ੍ਕਟਃ, ਕੀਟਭੇਦੋ ਵਾ| ਵਿਵਿਧਵਿਸਸਂਯੋਗੋਪਸ਼ਮਨਾਰ੍ਥਮਿਤਿ ਵਿਵਿਧਾਨਾਂ ਨਾਨਾਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਾਣਾਂ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਾਨਾਂ ਵਿਸਾਣਾਂ, ਸਂਯੋਗਃ ਸਙ੍ਗਮਃ, ਤਦੁਪਸ਼ਮਾਯ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ‘ਵਿਵਿਧਵਿਸਸਂਯੋਗਵਿਸੋਪਹਤੋਪਸ਼ਮਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਚ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ| ਸਂਯੋਗਵਿਸਂ ਸਮਾਨਮਧੁਘਤਾਦਿ||੮(੬)||

Meaning of the commentary

Kita includes creatures such as scorpions. Luta is glossed as markata, used here for a spider, or alternatively as a particular kind of kita. Various poisons include both sthavara and jangama kinds, and samyoga means their combination or coming together. The commentator also records an alternative reading referring to relieving people affected by various poisons and by samyoga-visha. Equal quantities of honey and ghee are given in the commentary as an example of the latter category. This is an example within the text's traditional classification.

Key terms

अगदतन्त्रं (agadatantraṃ)
The branch dealing here with the manifestations and alleviation of poisoning.
संयोगविषं (saṃyogaviṣaṃ)
A harmful combination discussed as a form of poison in the commentary.
स्थावरजङ्गमानां (sthāvarajaṅgamānāṃ)
Of the stationary-origin and moving-creature classes of poisons referred to here.

Adhikarana ੧੫ (੮(੭)) · Śloka ੮

ਰਸਾਯਨਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਨਾਮ ਵਯਃਸ੍ਥਾਪਨਮਾਯੁਰ੍ਮੇਧਾਬਲਕਰਂ ਰੋਗਾਪਹਰਣਸਮਰ੍ਥਂ ਚ (੭) |੮|

View original

रसायनतन्त्रं नाम वयःस्थापनमायुर्मेधाबलकरं रोगापहरणसमर्थं च (७) |८|

Meaning of the śloka

Rasayanatantra is described as maintaining the condition associated with age, promoting lifespan, understanding, and strength, and being capable of removing disease.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਰਸਾਯਨਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਵਯਃਸ੍ਥਾਪਨਂ ਵਰ੍ਸਸ਼ਤਮਾਯੁਃਸ੍ਥਾਪਨਮ੍| ਆਯੁਸ੍ਕਰਂ ਸ਼ਤਾਧਿਕਮਪਿ ਕਰੋਤਿ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਵਯਃਸ੍ਥਾਪਨਂ ਜਰਾਪਹਰਣਂ, ਤਾਰੁਣ੍ਯਂ ਬਹੁਕਾਲਂ ਸ੍ਥਾਪਯਤੀਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ||੮(੭)||

Meaning of the commentary

One explanation takes vayahsthapana to mean maintaining life for a hundred years, while ayushkara is understood as extending life beyond a hundred years. Another takes vayahsthapana to mean warding off old age by maintaining youthfulness for a long period. These are alternative interpretations of the traditional aims attributed to Rasayana, not verified promises of an outcome.

Key terms

वयःस्थापनं (vayaḥsthāpanaṃ)
Maintaining age-related condition; interpreted alternatively as sustaining life or preserving youthfulness.
आयुष्करं (āyuṣkaraṃ)
Promoting lifespan, distinguished from vayahsthapana in one explanation.

Adhikarana ੧੬ (੮(੮)) · Śloka ੮

ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਨਾਮਾਲ੍ਪਦੁਸ੍ਟਕ੍ਸੀਣਵਿਸ਼ੁਸ੍ਕਰੇਤਸਾਮਾਪ੍ਯਾਯਨਪ੍ਰਸਾਦੋਪਚਯਜਨਨਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ ਪ੍ਰਹਰ੍ਸਜਨਨਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਚ (੮) ||੮||

View original

वाजीकरणतन्त्रं नामाल्पदुष्टक्षीणविशुष्करेतसामाप्यायनप्रसादोपचयजनननिमित्तं प्रहर्षजननार्थं च (८) ||८||

Meaning of the śloka

Vajikaranatantra concerns nourishing, restoring the proper condition of, increasing, or generating retas when it is scanty, disturbed, depleted, or dried up, respectively. It also aims to produce sexual exhilaration.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਅਲ੍ਪਰੇਤਸਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਤ੍ਯੈਵ ਸ੍ਤੋਕਰੇਤਸਃ, ਤੇਸਾਮਾਪ੍ਯਾਯਨਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ; ਦੁਸ੍ਟਰੇਤਸੋ ਵਾਤਾਦਿਦੁਸ੍ਟਰੇਤਸਃ, ਤੇਸਾਂ ਪ੍ਰਸਾਦਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ; ਕ੍ਸੀਣਰੇਤਸਃ ਕਾਰਣੈਃ ਸ੍ਵਮਾਨਾਦਲ੍ਪੀਭੂਤਰੇਤਸਃ, ਤੇਸਾਮੁਪਚਯਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ; ਵਿਸ਼ੁਸ੍ਕਰੇਤਸਃ ਸ੍ਵਮਾਨਾਦਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਂ ਕ੍ਸੀਣਰੇਤਸਃ, ਤੇਸਾਂ ਜਨਨਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਮ੍| ਅਥਵਾਲ੍ਪਰੇਤਸਃ ਪਞ੍ਚਵਿਂਸ਼ਤਿਮਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤਾਃ, ਕ੍ਸੀਣਰੇਤਸਸ੍ਤੁ ਮਧ੍ਯਵਯਸਃ ਕਾਰਣਾਦਲ੍ਪੀਭੂਤਰੇਤਸਃ, ਸ਼ੁਸ੍ਕਰੇਤਸੋ ਵਦ੍ਧਾਃ| ਪ੍ਰਹਰ੍ਸਜਨਨਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਚੇਤਿ ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਸ੍ਯ ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਵਦ੍ਧਿਸ੍ਰੁਤਿਕਰਣਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਚੇਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ||੮(੮)||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator pairs each condition of retas with a corresponding aim. Naturally scanty retas calls for nourishment; retas disturbed by Vata and other doshas calls for restoration of its proper condition; retas reduced below its usual amount by particular causes calls for increase; and retas reduced to an extreme degree calls for generation. An alternative interpretation relates these descriptions to age: those who have not reached twenty-five are described as having scanty retas, middle-aged people whose retas has diminished through particular causes as having depleted retas, and elderly people as having dried-up retas. The final expression about producing praharsha is explained, for a person otherwise in health, as increasing shukra and bringing about its discharge. These explanations remain within the supplied traditional account.

Key terms

रेतसाम् (retasām)
Of retas, the reproductive material discussed under four conditions in this passage.
आप्यायन (āpyāyana)
Nourishment or replenishment, assigned here to naturally scanty retas.
प्रसाद (prasāda)
Restoration of proper condition, assigned here to retas affected by doshas.
प्रहर्षजननार्थं (praharṣajananārthaṃ)
For producing sexual exhilaration, further explained through shukra increase and discharge.

Adhikarana ੧੭ (੯) · Śloka ੯

ਏਵਮਯਮਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦੋਸ੍ਟਾਙ੍ਗ ਉਪਦਿਸ਼੍ਯਤੇ; ਅਤ੍ਰ ਕਸ੍ਮੈ ਕਿਮੁਚ੍ਯਤਾਮਿਤਿ ||੯||

View original

एवमयमायुर्वेदोऽष्टाङ्ग उपदिश्यते; अत्र कस्मै किमुच्यतामिति ||९||

Meaning of the śloka

Thus Ayurveda is taught in eight branches. Of these, which branch should be explained to which student?

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਏਵਮਯਮਿਤਿ|- ਏਵਮਨੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰੇਣ| ਅਤ੍ਰੇਤਿ ਏਸੁ ਮਧ੍ਯੇ| ਕਿਮਙ੍ਗਂ ਕਸ੍ਮੈ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਾਯੋਪਦਿਸ਼੍ਯਤਾਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਯਤਾਮ੍| ਇਤਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਸਾਮਾਨ੍ਯੇਨ||੯||

Meaning of the commentary

Evam means 'in this manner,' and atra means 'among these.' The question asks which particular branch should be taught or explained to which student. The closing iti is used in its general concluding sense.

Key terms

अष्टाङ्ग (aṣṭāṅga)
Having eight branches.
किमङ्गं (kimaṅgaṃ)
Which branch, in the question about allocating instruction to students.

Adhikarana ੧੮ (੧੦-੧੧) · Śloka ੧੧

ਤ ਊਚੁਃ- ਅਸ੍ਮਾਕਂ ਸਰ੍ਵੇਸਾਮੇਵ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਜ੍ਞਾਨਂ ਮੂਲਂ ਕਤ੍ਵੋਪਦਿਸ਼ਤੁ ਭਗਵਾਨਿਤਿ ||੧੦|| ਸ ਉਵਾਚੈਵਮਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤਿ ||੧੧||

View original

त ऊचुः- अस्माकं सर्वेषामेव शल्यज्ञानं मूलं कृत्वोपदिशतु भगवानिति ||१०|| स उवाचैवमस्त्विति ||११||

Meaning of the śloka

The students said, 'Revered teacher, please instruct all of us with knowledge of Shalya as the foundation.' He replied, 'Let it be so.'

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਤ ਊਚੁਃ ਤੇ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਾ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿ ਊਚੁਃ ਉਕ੍ਤਵਨ੍ਤਃ| ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਜ੍ਞਾਨਂ ਮੂਲਂ ਕਤ੍ਵਾ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਜ੍ਞਾਨਮਾਦੌ ਕਤ੍ਵਾ| ਸਃ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਃ, ਉਵਾਚ ਉਕ੍ਤਵਾਨ੍, ਏਵਮਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤਿ ਏਵਂ ਭਵਤ੍ਵਿਤਿ| ‘ਸ ਹੋਵਾਚ’ ਇਤਿ ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤੈਃ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯੈਃ ਸਹੇਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ||੧੦-੧੧||

Meaning of the commentary

The speakers are the students addressing Dhanvantari. Making knowledge of Shalya the mula is explained as placing that knowledge first. Dhanvantari's reply accepts their request. The commentator records the alternative reading 'sa hovacha' and explains it with reference to being together with those students.

Key terms

शल्यज्ञानं (śalyajñānaṃ)
Knowledge of Shalya, selected as the starting foundation of instruction.
मूलं (mūlaṃ)
The foundation or starting point, explained here as what is placed first.

Adhikarana ੧੯ (੧੨-੧੩) · Śloka ੧੩

ਤ ਊਚੁਰ੍ਭੂਯੋਪਿ ਭਗਵਨ੍ਤਮ੍- ਅਸ੍ਮਾਕਮੇਕਮਤੀਨਾਂ ਮਤਮਭਿਸਮੀਕ੍ਸ੍ਯ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤੋ ਭਗਵਨ੍ਤਂ ਪ੍ਰਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਤਿ, ਅਸ੍ਮੈ ਚੋਪਦਿਸ਼੍ਯਮਾਨਂ ਵਯਮਪ੍ਯੁਧਾਰਯਿਸ੍ਯਾਮਃ ||੧੨|| ਸ ਉਵਾਚੈਵਮਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤਿ ||੧੩||

View original

त ऊचुर्भूयोऽपि भगवन्तम्- अस्माकमेकमतीनां मतमभिसमीक्ष्य सुश्रुतो भगवन्तं प्रक्ष्यति, अस्मै चोपदिश्यमानं वयमप्युधारयिष्यामः ||१२|| स उवाचैवमस्त्विति ||१३||

Meaning of the śloka

The students again addressed the revered teacher: 'After considering the shared wish of all of us, Sushruta will ask you the questions, and we too will retain the teaching given to him.' He replied, 'Let it be so.'

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਪ੍ਰਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਤਿ ਪਚ੍ਛਾਂ ਕਰਿਸ੍ਯਤਿ||੧੨-੧੩||

Meaning of the commentary

Prakshyati means that he will ask a question.

Key terms

एकमतीनां (ekamatīnāṃ)
Of those who share one intention or view, here the students.
प्रक्ष्यति (prakṣyati)
He will ask, referring to Sushruta speaking for the students.

Adhikarana ੨੦ (੧੪) · Śloka ੧੪

ਵਤ੍ਸ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤ! ਇਹ ਖਲ੍ਵਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਂ- ਵ੍ਯਾਧ੍ਯੁਪਸਸ੍ਟਾਨਾਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਪਰਿਮੋਕ੍ਸਃ, ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਸ੍ਯ ਰਕ੍ਸਣਂ ਚ ||੧੪||

View original

वत्स सुश्रुत! इह खल्वायुर्वेदप्रयोजनं- व्याध्युपसृष्टानां व्याधिपरिमोक्षः, स्वस्थस्य रक्षणं च ||१४||

Meaning of the śloka

Dear Sushruta, the purpose of Ayurveda is to free those afflicted by disease from their disease and to protect the health of those who are well.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

‘ਵਤ੍ਸ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤ’ ਇਤਿ ਸਮ੍ਬੋਧਨੇ| ਅਸ੍ਯਾਗ੍ਰੇ ‘ਅਥਾਤ’ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਕਾ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਜ੍ਞਾ ਜ੍ਞਾਤਵ੍ਯੇਤਿ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਮੇਵੋਕ੍ਤਮ੍| ਇਹ ਖਲ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਾਰੇ, ਇਹ ਖਲੁ ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਾਰੇ ਇਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋਯਂ ਦੁਸ੍ਟੇਸੁ ਵਾਤਾਦਿਸੁ, ਤਤ੍ਕਾਰ੍ਯੇਸੁ ਜ੍ਵਰਾਦਿਸੁ ਕ੍ਲੇਸ਼ੇਸੁ, ਰਾਗਾਦਿਸੁ ਦੁਃਖੇਸੁ ਸਂਸਾਰਾਨੁਵਤ੍ਤਿਜਨਕੇਸੁ ਚ, ਵਰ੍ਤਤੇ; ਪਰਿਮੋਕ੍ਸੋ ਨਿਵਤ੍ਤਿਃ| ਨਨੁ, ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਪਰਿਮੋਕ੍ਸਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਰਕ੍ਸਣਾਭ੍ਯਾਮਨ੍ਯਦਪਿ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਮਸ੍ਤਿ, ਕਿਂ ਤਤ੍? ਯਾਪ੍ਯਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਤਰਕ੍ਸਾ ਰਸਾਯਨਾਦਾਯੁਰੁਤ੍ਕਰ੍ਸਸ਼੍ਚ, ਤਦਿਦਂ ਵਕ੍ਤਵ੍ਯਮ੍; ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ- ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਸ੍ਯ ਰਕ੍ਸਣਂ ਚੇਤਿ ਚਕਾਰੋਨੁਕ੍ਤਸਮੁਚ੍ਚਯਾਰ੍ਥਃ, ਤੇਨ ਯਾਪ੍ਯਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਤਰਕ੍ਸਣਂ ਰਸਾਯਨਾਦਾਯੁਰੁਤ੍ਕਰ੍ਸਸ਼੍ਚ; ਅਥਵਾ ਸਾਧ੍ਯਵ੍ਯਾਧੌ ਕ੍ਰਿਯੈਕਤ੍ਵਾਦ੍ ਯਾਪ੍ਯਾਵਰੋਧਃ, ਰਸਾਯਨਾਦਾਯੁਰੁਤ੍ਕਰ੍ਸਸ੍ਤੁ ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਰਕ੍ਸਯੈਵ ਗਹ੍ਯਤੇ||੧੪||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator recalls his earlier observation that the introductory promise beginning athata should be understood in the teaching sequence after this address to Sushruta. Iha khalu establishes the present topic as the origin of Ayurveda. Vyadhi is used broadly: it can refer to disturbed Vata and the other doshas, to their effects such as jvara, to afflictions, and to attachment and other forms of suffering that perpetuate samsara. Parimoksha means cessation or release. The commentator then asks whether supporting people with yapya disease and extending lifespan through Rasayana should be named as additional purposes. One answer is that cha, 'and,' includes these unstated purposes. Alternatively, support in yapya disease is included under disease management because the therapeutic action is shared, while the lifespan-related purpose of Rasayana is included under protecting the healthy.

Key terms

vyAdhiparimokShaH (vyādhiparimokṣaḥ)
Release from disease, explained as its cessation.
svasthasya rakShaNaM (svasthasya rakṣaṇaṃ)
Protection of a person who is in health.
yApyavyAdhitarakShA (yāpyavyādhitarakṣā)
Support or protection of a person with a disease requiring continued management.

Adhikarana ੨੧ (੧੫) · Śloka ੧੫

‘ਆਯੁਰਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ ਵਿਦ੍ਯਤੇ, ਅਨੇਨ ਵਾਯੁਰ੍ਵਿਨ੍ਦਨ੍ਤਿ’ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਃ ||੧੫||

View original

‘आयुरस्मिन् विद्यते, अनेन वाऽऽयुर्विन्दन्ति’ इत्यायुर्वेदः ||१५||

Meaning of the śloka

It is called Ayurveda because life is found within this knowledge, or because through it people obtain life.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਸ੍ਯ ਨਿਰੁਕ੍ਤਿਂ ਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਆਯੁਰਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਨਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਆਯੁਃ ਸ਼ਰੀਰੇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਿਯਸਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ਮਸਂਯੋਗਃ, ਤਦਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਨਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦੇ ਵਿਦ੍ਯਤੇ ਅਸ੍ਤੀਤ੍ਯਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਃ; ਅਥਵਾ ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵਿਦ੍ਯਤੇ ਜ੍ਞਾਯਤੇ ਅਨੇਨੇਤ੍ਯਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਃ; ਆਯੁਰ੍ਵਿਦ੍ਯਤੇ ਵਿਚਾਰ੍ਯਤੇ ਅਨੇਨ ਵੇਤ੍ਯਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਃ; ਆਯੁਰਨੇਨ ਵਿਨ੍ਦਤਿ ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਨੋਤੀਤਿ ਵਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਃ||੧੫||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentary offers several derivations of the name. Ayus is the conjunction of body, senses, sattva, and atman. Ayurveda may mean that this ayus is present within the discipline, that life is known through it, that life is examined through it, or that life is obtained through it. The different explanations use different senses of the verbal roots and are retained as alternatives.

Key terms

AyuH (āyuḥ)
Life, defined here as the conjunction of body, senses, sattva, and atman.
niruktiM (niruktiṃ)
An explanatory derivation of a word's meaning.
sharIrendriyasatvAtmasaMyogaH (śarīrendriyasattvātmasaṃyogaḥ)
The conjunction of body, senses, the mental principle, and atman that defines ayus here.

Adhikarana ੨੨ (੧੬) · Śloka ੧੬

ਤਸ੍ਯਾਙ੍ਗਵਰਮਾਦ੍ਯਂ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਾਗਮਾਨੁਮਾਨੋਪਮਾਨੈਰਵਿਰੁਦ੍ਧਮੁਚ੍ਯਮਾਨਮੁਪਧਾਰਯ ||੧੬||

View original

तस्याङ्गवरमाद्यं प्रत्यक्षागमानुमानोपमानैरविरुद्धमुच्यमानमुपधारय ||१६||

Meaning of the śloka

Attend to the teaching of its foremost and earliest branch, presented without conflict with direct perception, authoritative teaching, inference, and comparison.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਤਸ੍ਯਾਙ੍ਗਵਰਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਅਙ੍ਗਵਰਮ੍ ਅਙ੍ਗਸ਼੍ਰੇਸ੍ਠਮ੍| ਆਦ੍ਯਮ੍ ਆਦਿਭਵਮ੍| ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਾਗਮਾਨੁਮਾਨੋਪਮਾਨੈਰਵਿਰੁਦ੍ਧਮਿਤਿ ਅਨੇਨ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯੇਨਾਙ੍ਗਵਰੇਣ ਯੋਰ੍ਥਃ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦ੍ਯਤੇ ਸ ਖਲੁ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਾਦਿਭਿਰਪਿ ਤਥਾਵਗਮ੍ਯਤ ਇਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਮਿਤਿ ਯਤ੍ਕਿਞ੍ਚਿਦੇਵਾਰ੍ਥਸ੍ਯ ਸਾਕ੍ਸਾਤ੍ਕਾਰਿਜ੍ਞਾਨਂ ਤਦੇਵ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਂ, ਤਥਾਹਿ- “ਮਨੋਕ੍ਸਗਤਮਭ੍ਰਾਨ੍ਤਂ ਵਸ੍ਤੁ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਮੁਚ੍ਯਤੇ| ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਿਯਾਣਾਮਸਞ੍ਜ੍ਞਾਨਂ ਵਸ੍ਤੁਤਤ੍ਤ੍ਵੇ ਭ੍ਰਮਃ ਸ੍ਮਤਃ”- ਇਤਿ; ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਾਵਿਰੁਦ੍ਧਂ ਯਥਾ- ਸੂਰ੍ਯਾਵਲੋਕਨਾਨ੍ਨਾਸਾਨ੍ਤਃ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਵਰ੍ਤਿਪ੍ਰਵੇਸ਼ਨਾਚ੍ਚ ਕ੍ਸੁਤਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਦੁਰ੍ਭਾਵਃ| ਆਗਮੋ ਵੇਦਃ, ਆਪ੍ਤਾਨਾਂ ਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਵਾ; ਤਥਾਹਿ- “ਸਿਦ੍ਧਂ ਸਿਦ੍ਧੈਃ ਪ੍ਰਮਾਣੈਸ੍ਤੁ ਹਿਤਂ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ ਪਰਤ੍ਰ ਚ| ਆਗਮਃ ਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਾਪ੍ਤਾਨਾਮਾਪ੍ਤਾਸ੍ਤਤ੍ਤ੍ਵਾਰ੍ਥਵੇਦਿਨਃ”- ਇਤਿ; ਆਗਮਾਵਿਰੁਦ੍ਧਂ ਯਥਾ- ਪੁਰਾਣਾਦਿਸ੍ਵਪਿ ਸ਼੍ਰੂਯਤੇ- “ਰੁਦ੍ਰੇਣ ਯਜ੍ਞਸ੍ਯ ਸ਼ਿਰਸ਼੍ਛਿਨ੍ਨਮਸ਼੍ਵਿਭ੍ਯਾਂ ਸਂਹਿਤਮ੍” ਇਤਿ| ਆਗਮਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਕ੍ਸਫਲਤ੍ਵਾਦ੍ ਵਰੀਯਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਂ, ਤੇਨਾਨੁਮਾਨਾਤ੍ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਂ ਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟਵਾਨ੍| ਅਨੁ ਪਸ਼੍ਚਾਦਵ੍ਯਭਿਚਾਰਿਲਿਙ੍ਗਾਲ੍ਲਿਙ੍ਗੀ ਮੀਯਤੇ ਜ੍ਞਾਯਤੇ ਯੇਨ ਤਦਨੁਮਾਨਂ; ਤੇਨਾਨੁਮਾਨੇਨਾਵਿਰੁਦ੍ਧਂ ਯਥਾ- ਪ੍ਰਨਸ੍ਟੇ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯੇ ਚਨ੍ਦਨਘਤੋਪਦਿਗ੍ਧਾਯਾਂ ਤ੍ਵਚਿ ਵਿਸ਼ੋਸਣਵਿਲਯਨਾਭ੍ਯਾਮਨੁਮੀਯਤੇ- ਅਤ੍ਰ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਮਿਤਿ| ਪ੍ਰਸਿਦ੍ਧਸਾਧਰ੍ਮ੍ਯਾਤ੍ ਸੂਕ੍ਸ੍ਮਵ੍ਯਵਹਿਤਵਿਪ੍ਰਕਸ੍ਟਸ੍ਯਾਰ੍ਥਸ੍ਯ ਸਾਧਨਮੁਪਮਾਨਂ; ਤੇਨਾਵਿਰੁਦ੍ਧਂ ਯਥਾ- ਮਾਸਵਨ੍ਮਸਕਃ, ਤਿਲਮਾਤ੍ਰਸ੍ਤਿਲਕਾਲਕਃ, ਵਿਦਾਰੀਕਨ੍ਦਵਦ੍ ਵਿਦਾਰੀਰੋਗਃ, ਸ਼ਾਲੂਕਵਤ੍ ਪਨਸਿਕੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਉਚ੍ਯਮਾਨਮ੍ ਉਪਦਿਸ਼੍ਯਮਾਨਮ੍| ਮਯਾ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਣੇਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ||੧੬||

Meaning of the commentary

Angavara means the best branch, and adya means the earliest. The claim is that what Shalya teaches can also be understood through the four means of knowledge named in the passage. Pratyaksha is direct, non-erroneous knowledge of an object through mind and senses; failure to grasp an object's actual nature is distinguished as error. The commentary illustrates agreement with direct perception by the occurrence of sneezing after looking at the sun or after a thread-like wick enters the nose. Agama is the Veda or the teaching of trustworthy knowers of reality. It is described as supported by established means of knowledge and beneficial here and hereafter. The traditional account of Rudra severing Yajna's head and the Ashvins rejoining it is given as an example. Agama is placed before inference because its results are described as directly manifest. Anumana is knowledge of something indicated, obtained through a dependable sign. The example concerns inferring the site of a concealed shalya from local drying or melting when sandal paste and ghee have been applied to the skin. Upamana establishes something subtle, obscured, or distant through a familiar resemblance. Examples compare a mashaka with a masha, a tilakalaka with a sesame seed in size, vidari disease with a vidari tuber, and panasika with a shaluka. Uchyamanam means being taught, here by Dhanvantari.

Key terms

pratyakSham (pratyakṣam)
Direct, non-erroneous apprehension of an object.
Agamo (āgamo)
Authoritative teaching, here the Veda or the instruction of trustworthy knowers.
anumAnaM (anumānaṃ)
Inference from a dependable sign to what that sign indicates.
upamAnaM (upamānaṃ)
Understanding through a recognised similarity or comparison.

Adhikarana ੨੩ (੧੭) · Śloka ੧੭

ਏਤਦ੍ਧ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਂ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਂ, ਪ੍ਰਾਗਭਿਘਾਤਵ੍ਰਣਸਂਰੋਹਾਦ੍ਯਜ੍ਞਸ਼ਿਰਃਸਨ੍ਧਾਨਾਚ੍ਚ | ਸ਼੍ਰੂਯਤੇ ਹਿ ਯਥਾ- “ਰੁਦ੍ਰੇਣ ਯਜ੍ਞਸ੍ਯ ਸ਼ਿਰਸ਼੍ਛਿਨ੍ਨਮਿਤਿ, ਤਤੋ ਦੇਵਾ ਅਸ਼੍ਵਿਨਾਵਭਿਗਮ੍ਯੋਚੁਃ- ਭਗਵਨ੍ਤੌ ਨਃ ਸ਼੍ਰੇਸ੍ਠਤਮੌ ਯੁਵਾਂ ਭਵਿਸ੍ਯਥਃ, ਭਵਦ੍ਭ੍ਯਾਂ ਯਜ੍ਞਸ੍ਯ ਸ਼ਿਰਃ ਸਨ੍ਧਾਤਵ੍ਯਮਿਤਿ | ਤਾਵੂਚਤੁਰੇਵਮਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤਿ | ਅਥ ਤਯੋਰਰ੍ਥੇ ਦੇਵਾ ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਂ ਯਜ੍ਞਭਾਗੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਾਸਾਦਯਨ੍ | ਤਾਭ੍ਯਾਂ ਯਜ੍ਞਸ੍ਯ ਸ਼ਿਰਃ ਸਂਹਿਤਮ੍” ਇਤਿ ||੧੭||

View original

एतद्ध्यङ्गं प्रथमं, प्रागभिघातव्रणसंरोहाद्यज्ञशिरःसन्धानाच्च | श्रूयते हि यथा- “रुद्रेण यज्ञस्य शिरश्छिन्नमिति, ततो देवा अश्विनावभिगम्योचुः- भगवन्तौ नः श्रेष्ठतमौ युवां भविष्यथः, भवद्भ्यां यज्ञस्य शिरः सन्धातव्यमिति | तावूचतुरेवमस्त्विति | अथ तयोरर्थे देवा इन्द्रं यज्ञभागेन प्रासादयन् | ताभ्यां यज्ञस्य शिरः संहितम्” इति ||१७||

Meaning of the śloka

This branch is regarded as the first because it earlier brought about the healing of wounds caused by injury and the rejoining of Yajna's head. The received account says that Rudra severed Yajna's head. The gods approached the two Ashvins and asked them to rejoin it, promising them the highest standing among themselves. The Ashvins agreed. The gods then secured Indra's favour on their behalf through a share in the sacrifice, and the Ashvins rejoined Yajna's head.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਾਙ੍ਗਸ੍ਯਾਦ੍ਯਤ੍ਵਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਯਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਏਤਦ੍ਧੀਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਹਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋਵਧਾਰਣੇ, ਏਤੇਨੈਤਦੇਵਾਙ੍ਗਂ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਮਾਦ੍ਯਂ ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਂ ਵਾ| ਕਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਂ? ਪ੍ਰਾਗਭਿਘਾਤਵ੍ਰਣਸਂਰੋਹਾਤ੍|- ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਵ੍ਯਾਧੀਨਾਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਗੇਵ ਦੇਵਾਸੁਰਸਙ੍ਗ੍ਰਾਮੇਭਿਘਾਤਵ੍ਰਣੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਃ, ਤਤ੍ਸਂਰੋਹਾਤ੍| ਦ੍ਵਿਤੀਯਹੇਤੁਮਾਹ- ਯਜ੍ਞਸ਼ਿਰਃਸਨ੍ਧਾਨਾਚ੍ਚੇਤਿ| ਅਤ੍ਰਾਪਿ ਪ੍ਰਾਗਿਤਿ ਸਮ੍ਬਧ੍ਯਤੇ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤ੍ਵਤ੍ਰ ਯਜ੍ਞਸ਼ਿਰਃਸਨ੍ਧਾਨਾਚ੍ਚੇਤਿ| ਅਤ੍ਰਾਪਿ ਪ੍ਰਾਗਿਤਿ ਸਮ੍ਬਧ੍ਯਤੇ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤ੍ਵਤ੍ਰ ‘ਯਜ੍ਞਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਸ਼ਿਰਃਸਨ੍ਧਾਨਾਚ੍ਚ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ| ਯਤਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਗ੍ਯਜ੍ਞਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਭੂਤਸ੍ਯ ਸ਼ਿਰਸਃ ਸਨ੍ਧਾਨਂ ਤਸ੍ਮਾਦਿਦਮਾਦ੍ਯਮ੍| ਅਤ੍ਰੈਵ ਪਾਰਮ੍ਪਰ੍ਯੋਪਦੇਸ਼ਮਾਹ- ਸ਼੍ਰੂਯਤੇ ਹੀਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਯਾਵਤ੍ਸਂਹਿਤਮਿਤਿ| ਅਤ੍ਰ ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ‘ਸਂਹਿਤਂ’ ਇਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ‘ਸਨ੍ਧਿਤਂ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ||੧੭||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator uses this passage to establish the priority of Shalya. Hi gives emphasis: this branch is first, earliest, or principal. For the first reason, he states that wounds from injuries in the conflict between devas and asuras arose before bodily diseases and were healed through this branch. The second reason is the earlier rejoining of Yajna's head. The word 'earlier' is understood to apply to this event as well. An alternative reading calls the head the principal part of Yajna and uses its restoration to explain the branch's priority. The narrative is presented as a teaching handed down through tradition. Another variant reads sandhitam in place of samhitam, both referring here to the joining.

Key terms

abhighAtavraNa (abhighātavraṇa)
A wound arising from injury.
saMrohAt (saṃrohāt)
Because of healing or growing together, here of wounds.
sandhAnAcca (sandhānāc ca)
And because of rejoining, referring to the head in the traditional account.

Adhikarana ੨੪ (੧੮) · Śloka ੧੮

ਅਸ੍ਟਾਸ੍ਵਪਿ ਚਾਯੁਰ੍ਵੇਦਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੇਸ੍ਵੇਤਦੇਵਾਧਿਕਮਭਿਮਤਮ੍, ਆਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਾਦ੍ਯਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸ਼ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਕ੍ਸਾਰਾਗ੍ਨਿਪ੍ਰਣਿਧਾਨਾਤ੍ ਸਰ੍ਵਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸਾਮਾਨ੍ਯਾਚ੍ਚ ||੧੮||

View original

अष्टास्वपि चायुर्वेदतन्त्रेष्वेतदेवाधिकमभिमतम्, आशुक्रियाकरणाद्यन्त्रशस्त्रक्षाराग्निप्रणिधानात् सर्वतन्त्रसामान्याच्च ||१८||

Meaning of the śloka

Among all eight branches of Ayurveda, this branch is regarded here as especially important because of its prompt action, its use of yantra, shastra, kshara, and agni, and what it shares with the other branches.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਂ ਵਰਤ੍ਵੇ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਜ੍ਞਾਤਂ ਹੇਤੁਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਯਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਅਸ੍ਟਾਸ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਏਤਦੇਵਾਧਿਕਮਿਤਿ ਏਤਦੇਵਾਧਿਕਂ ਨਾਨ੍ਯਚ੍ਛਾਲਾਕ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਕਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍? ਆਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਾਤ੍| ਕੁਤੋਸ੍ਯ ਪੁਨਰਾਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਤ੍ਵਂ? ਯਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਪ੍ਰਣਿਧਾਨਾਤ੍, ਨ ਹਿ ਯਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਸੁ ਪ੍ਰਣਿਧਾਨੇ ਮਨ੍ਦਾ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾ ਕਰ੍ਤੁਂ ਯੁਕ੍ਤਾ, ਮਨ੍ਦਕਾਰਿਤ੍ਵੇ ਹ੍ਯਾਤੁਰਸ੍ਯ ਵ੍ਯਾਪਤ੍ਤਿਃ ਸ੍ਯਾਤ੍| ਵਰਤ੍ਵੇ ਦ੍ਵਿਤੀਯਂ ਹੇਤੁਮਾਹ- ਸਰ੍ਵਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸਾਮਾਨ੍ਯਾਚ੍ਚ; ਸ਼ਾਲਾਕ੍ਯਾਦਿਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਤੁਲ੍ਯਤ੍ਵਾਚ੍ਚ| ‘ਅਧਿਕਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਾਤ੍’ ਇਤਿ ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ| ਅਧਿਕਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਮਪ੍ਯਸ੍ਯ ਯਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਪ੍ਰਣਿਧਾਨਾਤ੍ ਸਰ੍ਵਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸਾਮਾਨ੍ਯਾਚ੍ਚ ਹੇਤੁਭ੍ਯਾਮ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਵਰਤ੍ਵੇ ਆਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਾਦਿਤਿ ਹੇਤੁਤ੍ਰਯਮਾਹੁਃ; ਆਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਾਤ੍ ਸ਼ੀਘ੍ਰਂ ਛੇਦਾਦਿਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਰਣਾਦਿਤਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਯਨ੍ਤਿ||੧੮||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator explains why Shalya has been called the foremost branch. Its prompt action is connected with applying yantra and the other named means: he says that slow action in their use is inappropriate because it may bring harm to the patient. A second reason is its common ground with branches such as Shalakya. Some read adhika-kriya-karana, performing a greater range or degree of action, instead of ashu-kriya-karana. On that reading, its use of the specified means and its shared scope with the other branches support the claim. Another interpretation counts three separate reasons in the original formulation and explains prompt action as quickly performing actions such as cutting. These are arguments about Shalya's standing within this text.

Key terms

AshukriyAkaraNAt (āśukriyākaraṇāt)
Because of prompt performance of action, one reason given for Shalya's importance.
sarvatantrasAmAnyAcca (sarvatantrasāmānyāc ca)
And because of common ground with all the branches.
adhikakriyAkaraNAt (adhikakriyākaraṇāt)
An alternative reading emphasising a greater range or degree of action.

Adhikarana ੨੫ (੧੯) · Śloka ੧੯

ਤਦਿਦਂ ਸ਼ਾਸ਼੍ਵਤਂ ਪੁਣ੍ਯਂ ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗ੍ਯਂ ਯਸ਼ਸ੍ਯਮਾਯੁਸ੍ਯਂ ਵਤ੍ਤਿਕਰਂ ਚੇਤਿ ||੧੯||

View original

तदिदं शाश्वतं पुण्यं स्वर्ग्यं यशस्यमायुष्यं वृत्तिकरं चेति ||१९||

Meaning of the śloka

This discipline is described as enduring, meritorious, conducive to heaven, reputation, and life, and as providing a livelihood.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਤਃ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯੋਤ੍ਸਾਹਨਾਯ ਯਥਾਭੂਤਾਂ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਂਸਾਮਾਹ- ਤਦਿਦਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਤਦਿਦਂ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ; ਸ਼ਾਸ਼੍ਵਤਮ੍ ਅਵਿਨਾਸ਼ਿ, ਅਥਵਾ ਸ਼ਾਸ਼੍ਵਤਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਮੋਕ੍ਸੋਭਿਧੀਯਤੇ, ਤਤ੍ਸਮ੍ਪਾਦਨਾਚ੍ਛਾਸ਼੍ਵਤਂ; ਪੁਣ੍ਯਂ ਪੁਣ੍ਯਹੇਤੁਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍; ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗਸ੍ਯ ਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗਾਯ ਹਿਤਂ ਵਾ ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗ੍ਯਂ; ਯਸ਼ਸੋ ਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ ਯਸ਼ਸੇ ਹਿਤਂ ਵਾ ਯਸ਼ਸ੍ਯਮ੍; ਆਯੁਸੋ ਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਮਾਯੁਸੇ ਹਿਤਂ ਵਾ ਆਯੁਸ੍ਯਂ; ਵਤ੍ਤਿਕਰਂ ਚੇਤਿ ਨਿਰ੍ਵਾਹਕਰਮ੍||੧੯||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator presents this praise of Shalyatantra as encouragement for the students. Shashvata can mean imperishable; alternatively, it can refer to moksha, with the discipline so described because it helps bring that about. Punya means a cause of merit. Svargya, yashasya, and ayushya mean either causes of, or things beneficial to, heaven, reputation, and life respectively. Vrittikara means providing the means of subsistence. These explanations preserve the aims stated in the traditional text.

Key terms

shAshvatam (śāśvatam)
Enduring or imperishable; alternatively connected by the commentator with moksha.
puNyaM (puṇyaṃ)
Meritorious, explained as being a cause of merit.
vRuttikaraM (vṛttikaraṃ)
Providing a livelihood or means of subsistence.

Adhikarana ੨੬ (੨੦) · Śloka ੨੦

ਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਵਾਚ ਤਤਃ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਪਤਿਰਧਿਜਗੇ, ਤਸ੍ਮਾਦਸ਼੍ਵਿਨੌ, ਅਸ਼੍ਵਿਭ੍ਯਾਮਿਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਃ, ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਾਦਹਂ, ਮਯਾ ਤ੍ਵਿਹ ਪ੍ਰਦੇਯਮਰ੍ਥਿਭ੍ਯਃ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਹਿਤਹੇਤੋਃ ||੨੦||

View original

ब्रह्मा प्रोवाच ततः प्रजापतिरधिजगे, तस्मादश्विनौ, अश्विभ्यामिन्द्रः, इन्द्रादहं, मया त्विह प्रदेयमर्थिभ्यः प्रजाहितहेतोः ||२०||

Meaning of the śloka

Brahma taught it first. Prajapati learned it from him; the Ashvins learned it from Prajapati; Indra learned it from the Ashvins; and I learned it from Indra. Here I must give this teaching to those who seek it, for the welfare of people.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਂ ਕ੍ਰਮਾਗਤਿਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਯਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਵਾਚੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਪ੍ਰੋਵਾਚ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਂ ਕਥਿਤਵਾਨ੍| ਤਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਪਤਿਰਧਿਜਗੇ ਇਤਿ ਪ੍ਰਜਾਪਤਿਰ੍ਦਕ੍ਸਃ, ਅਧਿਜਗੇ ਅਧੀਤਵਾਨ੍| ਮਯਾ ਤ੍ਵਿਹੇਤਿ ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗੇ ਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਣੈਵਾਰ੍ਥਿਭ੍ਯਃ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਂ ਦਤ੍ਤਂ, ਮਯਾ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਣਾ ਪੁਨਰਿਹ ਮਰ੍ਤ੍ਯਲੋਕੇ ਪ੍ਰਦੇਯਂ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਂ ਦਾਤਵ੍ਯਮਿਤਿ||੨੦||

Meaning of the commentary

This passage sets out the succession through which the teaching was received. Provacha means that Brahma taught it first. Prajapati is identified as Daksha, and adhijage means that he studied it. The speaker contrasts Brahma's first giving of the teaching to seekers in heaven with Dhanvantari's responsibility to give it here in the mortal world.

Key terms

kramAgatiM (kramāgatiṃ)
Transmission in succession, the subject of the commentary.
adhijage
He studied or learned it.
prajAhitahetoH (prajāhitahetoḥ)
For the purpose of people's welfare.

Adhikarana ੨੭ (੨੧) · Śloka ੨੧

ਭਵਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ- ਅਹਂ ਹਿ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਰਾਦਿਦੇਵੋ ਜਰਾਰੁਜਾਮਤ੍ਯੁਹਰੋਮਰਾਣਾਮ੍ | ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਾਙ੍ਗਮਙ੍ਗੈਰਪਰੈਰੁਪੇਤਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤੋਸ੍ਮਿ ਗਾਂ ਭੂਯ ਇਹੋਪਦੇਸ੍ਟੁਮ੍ ||੨੧||

View original

भवति चात्र- अहं हि धन्वन्तरिरादिदेवो जरारुजामृत्युहरोऽमराणाम् | शल्याङ्गमङ्गैरपरैरुपेतं प्राप्तोऽस्मि गां भूय इहोपदेष्टुम् ||२१||

Meaning of the śloka

The speaker declares: 'I am Dhanvantari, the primordial deity who removed old age, illness, and death from the immortals. I have come again to earth to teach the Shalya branch together with the other branches.'

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਥ ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਃ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਪ੍ਰਤੀਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਂ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕਮਾਹ- ਭਵਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਆਦਿਦੇਵਃ ਸ਼ਙ੍ਕਰਃ; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ, ਆਦਿਦੇਵਾ ਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਾਦਯਃ, ਕਰ੍ਮਦੇਵਾਃ ਸ਼ਤਕ੍ਰਤੁਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ, ਪ੍ਰਜਨਨਦੇਵਾਸ੍ਤੁ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਜਨਿਤਾਃ ਸ੍ਕਨ੍ਦਾਦਯਃ, ਤੇਸਾਮਹਮਾਦਿਦੇਵਃ; ਆਦਿਦੇਵਤ੍ਵੇਪਿ ਕਾਸ਼ਿਰਾਜਤ੍ਵਮੁਪਪਨ੍ਨਮਵਤਾਰਾਨ੍ਤਰਮਾਪਨ੍ਨਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਜਰਾਰੁਜਾਮਤ੍ਯੁਹਰੋਮਰਾਣਾਮਿਤਿ ਏਤੇਨੈਤਦੁਕ੍ਤਂ- ਦੇਵਾਨਾਮਪਿ ਪੁਰਾ ਜਰਾਦਯਸ੍ਤਸ੍ਥੁਃ, ਤੇ ਚ ਮਯਾ ਆਦਿਦੇਵੇਨ ਹਤਾਃ| ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤੋਸ੍ਮਿ ਗਾਂ ਭੂਯ ਇਹੋਪਦੇਸ੍ਟੁਮਿਤਿ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਮਹਂ ਦੇਵਕਾਰ੍ਯਾਰ੍ਥਂ ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤਃ, ਇਦਾਨੀਂ ਗਾਂ ਪਥਿਵੀਂ, ਭੂਯਃ ਪੁਨਃ, ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤੋਸ੍ਮਿ ਆਗਤੋਸ੍ਮਿ; ਇਹ ਮਰ੍ਤ੍ਯਲੋਕੇ, ਮਨੁਸ੍ਯਕਾਰ੍ਯਾਰ੍ਥਮੁਪਦੇਸ੍ਟੁਮ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ‘ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਂ ਮਹਚ੍ਛਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਵਰਂ ਗਹੀਤ੍ਵਾ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ| ਸ੍ਵਮਾਹਾਤ੍ਮ੍ਯਪ੍ਰਕਾਸ਼ਨਮਪਿ ਪਰਾਰ੍ਥਤ੍ਵਾਦ੍ਯਥਾਭੂਤਤ੍ਵਾਚ੍ਚ ਨ ਦੋਸਾਯ||੨੧||

Meaning of the commentary

The king of Kashi speaks this verse to establish the students' confidence. One interpretation identifies Adideva as Shankara. Another distinguishes primordial deities such as Brahma, deities associated with acts such as Shatakratu, and deities born for particular purposes such as Skanda, placing the speaker in the first category. Being an Adideva and being the king of Kashi are reconciled through his taking a different incarnation. The statement about removing old age, illness, and death means, in this traditional account, that the gods formerly experienced these conditions and that the speaker removed them. He explains his return to earth by saying that he had previously gone to heaven for the work of the gods and has now come to the mortal world to teach for human purposes. An alternative reading says that he came bearing Shalya, the great and foremost discipline. The commentator argues that declaring one's own greatness is not blameworthy here because it serves others and is regarded as truthful.

Key terms

Adidevo (ādidevo)
Primordial deity, an epithet explained in different ways by the commentary.
avatArAntaram (avatārāntaram)
Another incarnation, used to reconcile the speaker's divine identity with kingship.
gAM (gāṃ)
The earth, the destination of the speaker's return.

Adhikarana ੨੮ (੨੨) · Śloka ੨੨

ਅਸ੍ਮਿਞ੍ਛਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ ਪਞ੍ਚਮਹਾਭੂਤਸ਼ਰੀਰਿਸਮਵਾਯਃ ਪੁਰੁਸ ਇਤ੍ਯੁਚ੍ਯਤੇ | ਤਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾ, ਸੋਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਂ; ਕਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍? ਲੋਕਸ੍ਯ ਦ੍ਵੈਵਿਧ੍ਯਾਤ ; ਲੋਕੋ ਹਿ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਃ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰੋ ਜਙ੍ਗਮਸ਼੍ਚ; ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਾਤ੍ਮਕ ਏਵਾਗ੍ਨੇਯਃ, ਸੌਮ੍ਯਸ਼੍ਚ, ਤਦ੍ਭੂਯਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍; ਪਞ੍ਚਾਤ੍ਮਕੋ ਵਾ; ਤਤ੍ਰ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧੋ ਭੂਤਗ੍ਰਾਮਃ ਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜਜਰਾਯੁਜਾਣ੍ਡਜੋਦ੍ਭਿਜ੍ਜਸਞ੍ਜ੍ਞਃ ; ਤਤ੍ਰ ਪੁਰੁਸਃ ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਂ, ਤਸ੍ਯੋਪਕਰਣਮਨ੍ਯਤ੍; ਤਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ ਪੁਰੁਸੋਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਮ੍ ||੨੨||

View original

अस्मिञ्छास्त्रे पञ्चमहाभूतशरीरिसमवायः पुरुष इत्युच्यते | तस्मिन् क्रिया, सोऽधिष्ठानं; कस्मात्? लोकस्य द्वैविध्यात ; लोको हि द्विविधः स्थावरो जङ्गमश्च; द्विविधात्मक एवाग्नेयः, सौम्यश्च, तद्भूयस्त्वात्; पञ्चात्मको वा; तत्र चतुर्विधो भूतग्रामः संस्वेदजजरायुजाण्डजोद्भिज्जसञ्ज्ञः ; तत्र पुरुषः प्रधानं, तस्योपकरणमन्यत्; तस्मात् पुरुषोऽधिष्ठानम् ||२२||

Meaning of the śloka

In this discipline, purusha is the conjunction of the five mahabhutas and the embodied self. Therapeutic action is directed towards this purusha, who is its basis. The world is described in two divisions, stationary and moving. It is also described as agneya or saumya according to predominance, or alternatively as constituted of five elements. Living beings are grouped as samsvedaja, jarayuja, andaja, and udbhijja. Among these, the human being is the principal concern, and the rest serves as resources for that concern. Therefore, purusha is the basis of this discipline.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਸ੍ਮਿਞ੍ਛਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ ਪਞ੍ਚਮਹਾਭੂਤੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਪਞ੍ਚਮਹਾਭੂਤਾਨਿ ਪਥਿਵ੍ਯਾਦੀਨਿ, ਸ਼ਰੀਰੀ ਆਤ੍ਮਾ, ਸਮਵਾਯਃ ਸਂਯੋਗਃ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ‘ਤਤ੍ਰਾਸ੍ਮਿਞ੍ਛਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਤ੍ਰੇਤ੍ਯਨੇਨ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਮਧਿਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇ, ਤਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ, ਅਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਨਿਤਿ ਅਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਨਧਿਕਾਰੇ; ਕਿਂ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਵਤਿ? ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ- ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਧਿਕਾਰੇ ਵ੍ਯਾਧ੍ਯਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਪ੍ਰਸ੍ਤਾਵੇ ਚ| ਤਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ ਕ੍ਰਿਯੇਤਿ ਤਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਨਿਤਿ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟੇ ਪੁਰੁਸੇ, ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾ ਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰੋਦਿਤਂ ਕਰ੍ਮ, ਕਿਂ ਤਤ੍? ਭੇਸਜਸ਼ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਕ੍ਸਾਰਾਗ੍ਨਿਨਿਰ੍ਵਰ੍ਤ੍ਯਂ ਸ੍ਵਾਸ੍ਥ੍ਯਵਤ੍ਤਿਕਰਂ ਚ| ਕਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ ਤਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਨੇਵ ਕ੍ਰਿਯੇਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਸੋਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਮਿਤਿ|- ਯਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ ਸਃ ਪੁਰੁਸਃ, ਅਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਂ ਆਸ਼੍ਰਯਃ; ਕਸ੍ਯ? ਵ੍ਯਾਧੇਃ ਸ੍ਵਾਸ੍ਥ੍ਯਸ੍ਯ ਚ| ਅਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਤ੍ਵੇ ਹੇਤੁਮਾਹ- ਕਸ੍ਮਾਦਿਤਿ| ਲੋਕਸ੍ਯ ਜਗਤਃ, ਦ੍ਵੈਵਿਧ੍ਯਾਦ੍ ਦ੍ਵਿਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਲੋਕੋ ਹੀਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਹਿ ਯਸ੍ਮਾਦਰ੍ਥੇ| ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰੋ ਵਕ੍ਸਾਦਿਃ, ਜਙ੍ਗਮੋ ਮਨੁਸ੍ਯਾਦਿਃ| ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸੋਪਯੋਗਿਧਰ੍ਮਦ੍ਵਯਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਯਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਾਤ੍ਮਕ ਏਵੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਅਗ੍ਨਿਭੂਤਾਧਿਦੈਵਤਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਮਾਗ੍ਨੇਯਂ, ਸੋਮਭੂਤਾਧਿਦੈਵਤਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਂ ਸੌਮ੍ਯਮ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਾਤ੍ਮਕੋ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਹੇਤੁਕ ਇਤਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਯਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਨ੍ਨ, ਪਞ੍ਜਿਕਯਾ ਦੂਸਿਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਨਨੁ, ਸਰ੍ਵਭੂਤਾਨਾਂ ਸਰ੍ਵਤ੍ਰ ਸਾਨ੍ਨਿਧ੍ਯਮਸ੍ਤਿ ਤਤ੍ ਕਥਂ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਾਤ੍ਮਕ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਤਦ੍ਭੂਯਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਾਦਿਤਿ| ਤਦ੍ਬਾਹੁਲ੍ਯਾਦਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਪ੍ਰਾਯੇਣ ਹਿ ਸਰ੍ਵਂ ਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਂ ਸ਼ੀਤਮੁਸ੍ਣਂ ਨ ਤਤੀਯੋ ਰਾਸ਼ਿਰਸ੍ਤਿ, ਅਤੋ ਦ੍ਵਾਵੇਵ ਅਗ੍ਨੀਸੋਮੌ ਭੂਯਾਂਸੌ | ਅਧੁਨਾਵਿਸ਼ੇਸੇਣ ਦ੍ਵਿਤੀਯਂ ਪਕ੍ਸਮਾਹ- ਪਞ੍ਚਾਤ੍ਮਕੋ ਵੇਤਿ|- ਵਾਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਪਕ੍ਸਾਨ੍ਤਰੇ; ਤੇਨ ਸ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧੋਪਿ ਲੋਕਃ ਪਞ੍ਚਾਤ੍ਮਕਃ ਪਞ੍ਚਸ੍ਵਭਾਵ ਇਤ੍ਯਯਂ ਵਾ ਪਕ੍ਸਃ| ਇਦਾਨੀਂ ਜਙ੍ਗਮਾਨ੍ ਪਥਕ੍ਕਰ੍ਤੁਮਾਹ- ਤਤ੍ਰੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਤਤ੍ਰ ਤਯੋਃ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਯੋਰ੍ਮਧ੍ਯੇ, ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਃ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਃ, ਭੂਤਗ੍ਰਾਮਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਿਸਮੂਹਃ| ਅਥ ਕੇ ਤੇ ਚਤ੍ਵਾਰਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਭੁਵਃ ਸ਼ਰੀਰਸ੍ਯ ਚ ਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਾਦੂਸ੍ਮਣੋ ਜਾਤਾਃ ਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜਾਃ; ਜਰਾਯੋਰ੍ਜਾਤਾ ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾਃ, ਜਰਾਯੁਰ੍ਗਰ੍ਭਾਸ਼ਯਃ; ਅਣ੍ਡਾਜ੍ਜਾਤਾਃ ਅਣ੍ਡਜਾਃ, ਅਣ੍ਡਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਣ੍ਯਾਧਾਰੋ ਵਰ੍ਤੁਲਂ; ਭੁਵਮੁਦ੍ਭਿਦ੍ਯ ਜਾਤਾ ਉਦ੍ਭਿਜ੍ਜਾਃ; ਸਞ੍ਜ੍ਞਾਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯੇਕਂ ਸਮ੍ਬਧ੍ਯਤੇ| ਚਤੁਰ੍ਧਾ ਨਿਪਤਿਤਾਨਾਮੂਸ੍ਮਾਣਂ ਵਿਨਾ ਕਸ੍ਯਚਿਤ੍ ਸਿਦ੍ਧਿਰ੍ਨਾਸ੍ਤੀਤਿ ਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਾਙ੍ਨਿਰ੍ਦੇਸ਼ਃ; ਕੇਚਿਦਨ੍ਯਥਾਕ੍ਰਮਂ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਨ੍ਨ, ਪਞ੍ਜਿਕਯਾ ਦੂਸਿਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਲੋਕਦ੍ਵੈਵਿਧ੍ਯਾਦਿਤਿ ਪ੍ਰਾਗੁਦ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟਹੇਤ੍ਵਰ੍ਥਂ ਸ੍ਫੁਟੀਕੁਰ੍ਵਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਤਤ੍ਰ ਪੁਰੁਸ ਇਤਿ|- ਤਤ੍ਰ ਤਯੋਃ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਯੋਰ੍ਮਧ੍ਯੇ ਪੁਰੁਸਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯੇਨ ਗੁਣੇਨ ਪਥਕ੍ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇ| ਯਦ੍ਯਪ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ਪਞ੍ਚਮਹਾਭੂਤਸ਼ਰੀਰਿਸਮਵਾਯਃ ਪੁਰੁਸ ਇਤਿ ਸਾਮਾਨ੍ਯੇਨ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਪਸ਼੍ਵਾਦਿਰਪਿ ਵਾਚ੍ਯਃ, ਤਥਾਪਿ ਮਨੁਸ੍ਯਜਾਤਿਰੇਵਾਤ੍ਰ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨੋਚ੍ਯਤੇ, ਤਸ੍ਯੋਪਕਾਰ੍ਯਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍; ਇਤਰਸ੍ਯ ਚਾਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਮ੍, ਉਪਕਰਣਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਅਤ ਏਵਾਹ- ਤਸ੍ਯੋਪਕਰਣਮਨ੍ਯਦਿਤਿ|- ਤਸ੍ਯ ਮਨੁਸ੍ਯਜਾਤੇਃ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯ, ਅਨ੍ਯਤ੍ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜਾਦਿ, ਉਪਕਰਣਮ੍| ਉਪਕਰਣਤ੍ਵਾਦਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਤ੍ਵਮਿਤ੍ਯਤ ਆਹ- ਤਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ ਪੁਰੁਸੋਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਮ੍| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਪੁਰੁਸਃ ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਮਿਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ‘ਤੇਸੁ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਸੁ ਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜਾਦਿਸੁ ਮਧ੍ਯੇ’ ਇਤ੍ਯਨ੍ਯੇ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਯਨ੍ਤਿ||੨੨||

Meaning of the commentary

The five mahabhutas are earth and the others; shariri is atman, and samavaya is explained here as conjunction. An alternative opening reading specifies Shalyatantra and the present discussion of therapeutic action and the basis of disease. Kriya includes the actions taught in the discipline involving medicines, shastra, kshara, and agni, as well as measures for maintaining health. Purusha is their basis because it is the locus of both disease and health. The world is divided into sthavara, such as trees, and jangama, such as human beings. The further distinction between agneya and saumya is introduced for its relevance to treatment. The commentary connects them with the natures associated with Agni and Soma. It rejects the reading that makes 'twofold' mean 'having two causes,' citing criticism in the Panjika. Although all the elements are present, the twofold description rests on predominance: substances are generally considered cold or hot. An alternative formulation describes both divisions of the world as fivefold in elemental constitution. The four traditional classes of living beings are explained as follows: samsvedaja arise from the moisture or warmth of the earth or body; jarayuja arise from jarayu, glossed as the womb; andaja arise from an egg, described as a rounded support of a living being; and udbhijja emerge by breaking through the earth. Samsvedaja is placed first because heat is considered necessary for the coming into being of all four. The commentary notes but rejects a different order of the list, again referring to the Panjika. Although the broad definition of purusha could include animals, here the word specifically denotes the human being, whose benefit is the principal concern. Other stationary and moving beings are treated as resources for that purpose. A final alternative interpretation locates the statement of human primacy specifically within the four classes beginning with samsvedaja. This explains why purusha is selected as the locus of the discipline.

Key terms

puruSha (puruṣa)
The conjunction of the five mahabhutas and embodied self; here specifically the human subject of treatment.
adhiShThAnaM (adhiṣṭhānaṃ)
The basis or locus, here of disease, health, and therapeutic action.
AgneyaH (āgneyaḥ)
Characterised by predominance associated with Agni.
saumyashca (saumyaś ca)
And characterised by predominance associated with Soma.
bhUtagrAmaH (bhūtagrāmaḥ)
The collective group of living beings classified here by their manner of arising.

Adhikarana ੨੯ (੨੩) · Śloka ੨੩

ਤਦ੍ਦੁਃਖਸਂਯੋਗਾ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯ ਉਚ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ ||੨੩||

View original

तद्दुःखसंयोगा व्याधय उच्यन्ते ||२३||

Meaning of the śloka

Those associations that bring suffering to this purusha are called diseases.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਨਨੁ, ਕੇ ਤੇ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯੋ ਯੇਸਾਂ ਪੁਰੁਸੋਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਤਦ੍ਦੁਃਖੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਤਚ੍ਛਬ੍ਦੇਨਾਨਨ੍ਤਰਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟਃ ਪੁਰੁਸੋਧਿਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇ, ਦੁਃਖਂ ਕਾਯਵਾਙ੍ਮਾਨਸੀ ਪੀਡਾ| ਵਿਵਿਧਂ ਦੁਃਖਮਾਦਧਤੀਤਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯਃ, ਤਸ੍ਯ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯ ਦੁਃਖਾਯ ਸਂਯੋਗੋ ਯੇਸਾਮਾਗਨ੍ਤੁਪ੍ਰਭਤੀਨਾਂ ਤੇ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯਃ; ਅਥਵਾ ਤਸ੍ਯ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯ ਯੇਸੁ ਸਤ੍ਸੁ, ਯੈਰ੍ਵਾ ਕਰਣਭੂਤੈਃ, ਯੇਭ੍ਯੋ ਵਾ ਦੁਃਖਂ ਜਾਯਤੇ, ਤੇ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯਃ| ਏਤੌ ਵਾਕ੍ਯਾਰ੍ਥੌ ਨ੍ਯਾਯ੍ਯੌ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਤਸ੍ਯ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯ ਦੁਃਖਾਨਾਂ ਵੇਦਨਾਨਾਂ ਯੇ ਸਂਯੋਗਾਸ੍ਤੇ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯਃ; ਅਪਰੇ ਤੁ ਦੁਰ੍ਦੁਸ੍ਟਾਨਿ ਖਾਨਿ ਸ੍ਰੋਤਾਂਸਿ ਦੁਃਖਾਨਿ, ਤਸ੍ਯ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯ ਦੁਃਖਾਨਾਂ ਦੁਸ੍ਟਸ੍ਰੋਤਸਾਂ ਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ ਸਂਯੋਗੋ ਯੇਸਾਂ ਤੇ ਤਥੋਕ੍ਤਾਃ| ਏਤਾਵਨ੍ਯਾਯ੍ਯੌ, ਪਞ੍ਜਿਕਯਾ ਦੂਸਿਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍||੨੩||

Meaning of the commentary

Tat refers back to purusha. Duhkha is distress involving body, speech, or mind. The word vyadhi is explained through the bringing of different kinds of suffering. The commentator accepts two ways of construing the statement. Diseases such as the externally caused kinds are those whose association with purusha brings suffering. Alternatively, diseases are those conditions in whose presence, through whose agency, or from which suffering arises for purusha. He then records two other interpretations but rejects them, referring to criticism in the Panjika: one treats diseases as the combinations of the person's painful sensations; the other divides duhkha into an explanation involving damaged kha or srotas and makes the association a cause of disturbed channels. These rejected readings are not merged with the two accepted interpretations.

Key terms

duHkhaM (duḥkhaṃ)
Distress or suffering involving body, speech, or mind.
vyAdhayaH (vyādhayaḥ)
Diseases, explained through their bringing suffering to purusha.
saMyogo (saṃyogo)
Association or conjunction, central to the proposed definitions of disease.

Adhikarana ੩੦ (੨੪) · Śloka ੨੪

ਤੇ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਾਃ- ਆਗਨ੍ਤਵਃ, ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਃ, ਮਾਨਸਾਃ, ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਸ਼੍ਚੇਤਿ ||੨੪||

View original

ते चतुर्विधाः- आगन्तवः, शारीराः, मानसाः, स्वाभाविकाश्चेति ||२४||

Meaning of the śloka

Diseases are of four kinds: agantu, sharira, manasa, and svabhavika—externally caused, bodily, mental, and naturally arising.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਤੇ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਪੂਰ੍ਵਮੁਤ੍ਪਨ੍ਨਤ੍ਵਾਦਾਗਨ੍ਤੋਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਗਭਿਧਾਨਂ; ਤਤਃ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਃ, ਸ਼ਰੀਰਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਾਤ੍; ਤਤਃ ਸ਼ੇਸਾਵਿਤਿ| ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵੇਨ ਭਵਨ੍ਤੀਤਿ ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਃ, ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵੋ ਹ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ਸਹਜੋ ਧਰ੍ਮਃ| ਆਗਨ੍ਤੁਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤਾਃ| ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਸ਼੍ਚੇਤਿ ਚਕਾਰਃ ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਸ੍ਯ ਵ੍ਯਾਧੇਰਾਗਨ੍ਤੁਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਭਿਃ ਸਹਾਤੁਲ੍ਯਬਲਤਾਂ ਸੂਚਯਤਿ| ਇਤਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਸ਼੍ਚਤੁਸ੍ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਸਮਾਪ੍ਤੌ||੨੪||

Meaning of the commentary

The externally caused group is named first because, in the preceding account, it arose first. Bodily disease follows because of the body's importance, and the other two groups follow it. Svabhavika means arising through svabhava, understood here as an inherent characteristic. The other categories have already been explained. The word cha is taken to indicate that naturally arising disease does not have the same strength or standing as the other categories. Iti completes the fourfold enumeration.

Key terms

AgantavaH (āgantavaḥ)
Externally caused diseases, placed first in this classification.
svAbhAvikAH (svābhāvikāḥ)
Conditions arising from inherent nature.
svabhAvo (svabhāvo)
Inherent or naturally present characteristic.

Adhikarana ੩੧ (੨੫(੧)) · Śloka ੨੫

ਤੇਸਾਮਾਗਨ੍ਤਵੋਭਿਘਾਤਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਾਃ |੨੫|

View original

तेषामागन्तवोऽभिघातनिमित्ताः |२५|

Meaning of the śloka

Of these, agantu disorders arise from injury or impact.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਮਾਗਨ੍ਤੁਪ੍ਰਭਤੀਨੇਵ ਵਿਵਰਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਤੇਸਾਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਅਭਿਘਾਤਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਾ ਇਤਿ ਅਭਿਘਾਤਃ ਅਭਿਹਨਨਂ ਸ਼ਰਾਦਿਪ੍ਰਹਾਰਃ, ਸ ਏਵ ਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ ਯੇਸਾਂ ਤੇ ਤਥੋਕ੍ਤਾਃ||੨੫(੧)||

Meaning of the commentary

Abhighata means a blow or injury, such as a strike from an arrow. A disorder is called abhighata-nimitta when such an injury is its cause.

Key terms

abhighAtaH (abhighātaḥ)
An impact or injury, illustrated by a strike from an arrow.
nimittaM (nimittaṃ)
The causative factor, here the injury.

Adhikarana ੩੨ (੨੫(੨)) · Śloka ੨੫

ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਨ੍ਨਪਾਨਮੂਲਾ ਵਾਤਪਿਤ੍ਤਕਫਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਸਨ੍ਨਿਪਾਤਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਾਃ |੨੫|

View original

शारीरास्त्वन्नपानमूला वातपित्तकफशोणितसन्निपातवैषम्यनिमित्ताः |२५|

Meaning of the śloka

Bodily disorders have food and drink as their root and arise from imbalance involving Vata, Pitta, Kapha, shonita, or their combined disturbance.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਨ੍ਨਪਾਨਮੂਲਾ ਇਤਿ ਸਾਮਰ੍ਥ੍ਯਾਦ੍ਵਿਸਮਾਨ੍ਨਹੇਤਵਃ, ਨ ਹ੍ਯਨ੍ਨਸਾਮ੍ਯਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਹੇਤੁਃ| ਤਚ੍ਚਾਨ੍ਨਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਂ ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਵਤ੍ਤਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਮੁਪਲਕ੍ਸਯਤਿ, ਤੇਨ ਕਾਲਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਂ ਕਾਯਵਾਙ੍ਮਨੋਵਿਹਾਰਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਮਿਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਿਯਾਰ੍ਥਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਂ ਚ ਲਕ੍ਸਯਤਿ| ‘ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਣਾਂ ਵਿਕਾਰਾਣਾਮੇਸ ਵਰ੍ਗਸ਼੍ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਃ| ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪੇ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮੇ ਚੈਵ ਹੇਤੁਰੁਕ੍ਤਸ਼੍ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਕੈਃ’- ਇਤ੍ਯੇਸਾਂ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਮਕਤ੍ਵਾ, ਅਨ੍ਨਗ੍ਰਹਣੇਨੈਤਾਨੁਪਲਕ੍ਸਯਨ੍ਨੇਤਲ੍ਲਕ੍ਸਯਤਿ- ਯਥਾਨ੍ਨਮੇਵੈਸਾਂ ਸਮ੍ਭਵੇ ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਹੇਤੁਸ੍ਤਥਾ ਨਾਨ੍ਯੇ| ਵਾਤਪਿਤ੍ਤਕਫਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਸਨ੍ਨਿਪਾਤਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਾ ਇਤਿ ਵਾਤਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਸਨ੍ਨਿਪਾਤਾਨ੍ਤਾਨਾਂ ਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਂ ਵਿਸਮਤਾ ਤਦੇਵ ਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ ਯੇਸਾਂ ਤੇ ਤਥੋਕ੍ਤਾਃ; ਤੇ ਪੁਨਰ੍ਵਾਤਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਸਞ੍ਚਯਾਦਿਜ੍ਞਾਪਕਾ ਵਾਤਪੂਰ੍ਣਕੋਸ੍ਠਤਾਦਯੋ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯਃ| ਤਚ੍ਚ ਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਂ ਕ੍ਸਯੇਣ ਵਦ੍ਧ੍ਯਾ ਵਾ| ਦੋਸਪ੍ਰਸ੍ਤਾਵੇ ਦੂਸ੍ਯਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਗ੍ਰਹਣੇ ਹੇਤੁਰ੍ਵਕ੍ਤਵ੍ਯਃ? ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ- ਏਤਦ੍ਧਿ ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ, ਸ਼ਲ੍ਯਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ ਚ ਵ੍ਰਣਃ ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਭੂਤਃ, ਵ੍ਰਣੇ ਚ ਦੂਸ੍ਯੇਸੁ ਮਧ੍ਯੇ ਰਕ੍ਤਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਮਿਤਿ ਸ਼ੋਣਿਤੋਪਾਦਾਨਮ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਦੋਸਦੂਸਿਤਤ੍ਵਾਦ੍ਰਕ੍ਤਮਪਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਧ੍ਯੁਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਂ ਭਵਤਿ, ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਤਿ ਚੈਵਂ- “ਦੋਸਦੂਸਿਤੇਸ੍ਵਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਂ ਧਾਤੁਸੁ ਸਞ੍ਜ੍ਞਾ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇ- ਰਸਜੋਯਂ, ਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਜੋਯਮ੍” (ਸੂ. ਅ. ੨੪) ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ; ਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਜੋਯਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਵ੍ਯਪਦੇਸ਼ੋ ਘਤਾਦਿਦਗ੍ਧਵਤ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯਨਿਬਨ੍ਧਕਾਰੈਰ੍ਬਹੂਕ੍ਤਂ, ਤਚ੍ਚ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਬੁਦ੍ਧਿਵ੍ਯਾਕੁਲਤ੍ਵਹੇਤੁਤ੍ਵਾਦਸ੍ਮਾਭਿਰੁਪੇਕ੍ਸਿਤਮ੍||੨੫(੨)||

Meaning of the commentary

The reference to food and drink means their inappropriate use, since balanced food is not regarded as a cause of disease. It also points more broadly to departures from svasthavritta: disturbances involving time, activities of body, speech, and mind, and the relation between senses and their objects. The commentator says that naming food instead of listing all these factors highlights its principal role in the arising of such disorders. Imbalance may consist in either decrease or increase. Its manifestations include disorders that reveal the accumulation and other states of Vata and the other factors, such as a feeling of the abdomen being filled with Vata. The commentary asks why shonita, a dushya, is included in a discussion of doshas. One answer is specific to Shalyatantra: wounds are central to it, and rakta is especially important among the dushyas in wounds. Another answer is that rakta disturbed by doshas can itself become a cause of disease. The cited later passage names disorders according to the dhatu strongly affected by doshas, such as rasa or shonita, by analogy with calling a burn one caused by ghee. The commentator declines to reproduce the more extensive discussions of other authors because they could confuse the student.

Key terms

annapAnamUlA (annapānamūlā)
Having food and drink as their root, interpreted as inappropriate use rather than balanced intake.
vaiShamyaM (vaiṣamyaṃ)
Imbalance, which the commentary says can involve either decrease or increase.
shoNita (śoṇita)
Blood, included here because of its role in wounds or as a dosha-affected factor in disease.
dUShya (dūṣya)
A bodily constituent liable to be affected by doshas, the category under which blood is discussed here.

Adhikarana ੩੩ (੨੫(੩)) · Śloka ੨੫

ਮਾਨਸਾਸ੍ਤੁ ਕ੍ਰੋਧਸ਼ੋਕਭਯਹਰ੍ਸਵਿਸਾਦੇਰ੍ਸ੍ਯਾਭ੍ਯਸੂਯਾਦੈਨ੍ਯਮਾਤ੍ਸਰ੍ਯਕਾਮਲੋਭਪ੍ਰਭਤਯ ਇਚ੍ਛਾਦ੍ਵੇਸਭੇਦੈਰ੍ਭਵਨ੍ਤਿ |੨੫|

View original

मानसास्तु क्रोधशोकभयहर्षविषादेर्ष्याभ्यसूयादैन्यमात्सर्यकामलोभप्रभृतय इच्छाद्वेषभेदैर्भवन्ति |२५|

Meaning of the śloka

Mental disturbances such as anger, grief, fear, excessive elation, despondency, envy, fault-finding resentment, dejection, hostility towards others' merits, desire, and greed arise through different forms of attraction and aversion.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਮਾਨਸਾਨ੍ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਯਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਮਾਨਸਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਕ੍ਰੋਧਃ ਪਰਾਭਿਦ੍ਰੋਹਲਕ੍ਸਣਃ, ਸ਼ੋਕਃ ਪੁਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਵਿਯੋਗੇ ਚਿਤ੍ਤੋਦ੍ਵੇਗਃ, ਭਯਂ ਪਰਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਸਃ, ਹਰ੍ਸ ਉਤ੍ਸੇਕਃ, ਨਿਰ੍ਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਮਨ੍ਯਸ੍ਯ ਦੋਸੋਤ੍ਪਾਦਨੇਨਾਤ੍ਮਨਃ ਪ੍ਰੀਤਿਜਨਨਂ ਵਾ ਹਰ੍ਸਃ, ਅਸਿਦ੍ਧਿਭਯਾਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧੇਸੁ ਕਰ੍ਮਸੁ ਸਾਦੋਪ੍ਰਵਤ੍ਤਿਃ ਵਿਸਾਦਃ, ਈਰ੍ਸ੍ਯਾ ਪਰਸਮ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਾਵਸਹਿਸ੍ਣੁਤਾ, ਛਿਦ੍ਰਾਨ੍ਵੇਸਿਤਯਾ ਪਰਗੁਣੇਸੁ ਦੋਸਾਰੋਪਣਮਸੂਯਾ, ਦੈਨ੍ਯਂ ਕ੍ਲਿਸ੍ਟਚਿਤ੍ਤਤਾ, ਮਾਤ੍ਸਰ੍ਯਂ ਪਰਗੁਣੇਸ੍ਵਮਾਧ੍ਯਸ੍ਥ੍ਯਂ ਕ੍ਰੌਰ੍ਯਂ ਵਾ, ਕਾਮ ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਿਯਾਰ੍ਥੇਸ੍ਵਭਿਕਾਙ੍ਕ੍ਸਾ, ਲੋਭਃ ਪਰਸ੍ਵਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਭਿਲਾਸਃ, ਆਦਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਨ੍ਮਾਨਮਦਦਮ੍ਭਾਦਯਃ| ਇਚ੍ਛਾਦ੍ਵੇਸਭੇਦੈਰ੍ਭਵਨ੍ਤੀਤਿ ਇਚ੍ਛਾ ਸਾਤਿਸ਼ਯੋਰ੍ਥਾਭਿਲਾਸਃ, ਸਾ ਚ ਨਾਨਾਵਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਵਲਮ੍ਬਿਨੀ ਨਾਨਾਕਾਮਤਸ਼੍ਚ ਭਿਨ੍ਨਾ ਭਵਤਿ; ਤਤ੍ਰ ਹਰ੍ਸਸ਼ੋਕਦੈਨ੍ਯਕਾਮਲੋਭਾਦਯ ਇਚ੍ਛਾਭੇਦੇਨ; ਦ੍ਵੇਸਃ ਅਪ੍ਰੀਤਿਃ,ਸੋਪਿ ਨਾਨਾਵਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਵਲਮ੍ਬੀ ਨਾਨਾਰੂਪੋ ਭਵਤਿ, ਕ੍ਰੋਧਭਯਵਿਸਾਦੇਰ੍ਸ੍ਯਾਸੂਯਾਮਾਤ੍ਸਰ੍ਯਾਣਿ ਦ੍ਵੇਸਭੇਦੇਨ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ‘ਮਾਨਸਾਃ ਕ੍ਰੋਧਸ਼ੋਕਭਯਦੈਨ੍ਯੇਰ੍ਸ੍ਯਾਸੂਯਾਮਾਤ੍ਸਰ੍ਯਕਾਮਾਦਯਃ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ||੨੫(੩)||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator defines krodha as hostility towards another, shoka as mental agitation at separation from a child or another loved person, and bhaya as fear of another. Harsha is excessive elation; alternatively, it is pleasure in oneself produced by attributing faults to another without reason. Vishada is loss of energy or failure to begin activities through fear of not succeeding. Irshya is inability to bear another's prosperity, while asuya is looking for weaknesses and imposing faults on another's virtues. Dainya is an afflicted state of mind. Matsarya is lack of impartiality towards another's merits, or alternatively cruelty. Kama is longing for sense objects, and lobha is the wish to take another's possessions. The open-ended list also includes mana, mada, dambha, and related states. Iccha is strong desire for an object. It takes different forms according to its objects and the particular desires involved; harsha, shoka, dainya, kama, lobha, and similar states are assigned to this side. Dvesha is dislike, also varying with its objects and forms; krodha, bhaya, vishada, irshya, asuya, and matsarya are assigned to it. An alternative textual reading gives a shorter list of mental disturbances. The commentary's definitions and groupings are preserved without equating them with modern diagnostic categories.

Key terms

icchA (icchā)
Strong desire or attraction, one source of the mental states classified here.
dveShaH (dveṣaḥ)
Dislike or aversion, the other source in this classification.
IrShyA (īrṣyā)
Inability to tolerate another person's prosperity.
asUyA (asūyā)
Fault-seeking that imputes defects to another's virtues.
viShAdaH (viṣādaḥ)
Inactivity or dejection arising from fear that an undertaking will not succeed.

Adhikarana ੩੪ (੨੫(੪)) · Śloka ੨੫

ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਸ੍ਤੁ ਕ੍ਸੁਤ੍ਪਿਪਾਸਾਜਰਾਮਤ੍ਯੁਨਿਦ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਰਕ(ਭ)ਤਯਃ ||੨੫||

View original

स्वाभाविकास्तु क्षुत्पिपासाजरामृत्युनिद्राप्रकृ(भृ)तयः ||२५||

Meaning of the śloka

The naturally arising conditions include hunger, thirst, old age, death, and sleep.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਨ੍ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤੁਮਾਹ- ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਕ੍ਸੁਦ੍ ਭੋਕ੍ਤੁਮਿਚ੍ਛਾ, ਪਿਪਾਸਾ ਪਾਤੁਮਿਚ੍ਛਾ, ਜਰਾ ਵਾਰ੍ਧਕ੍ਯਂ, ਮਤ੍ਯੁਃ ਸ਼ਰੀਰੇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਿਯਾਤ੍ਮਮਨਸਾਂ ਵਿਯੋਗਃ, ਨਿਦ੍ਰਾ ਮੇਧ੍ਯਾਨਾਡੀਮਨਃਸਂਯੋਗਾਦ੍ਦੇਹੇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਿਯਾਣਾਂ ਸੁਖਭੋਗਃ; ਪ੍ਰਕਤਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਕਤਿਭਵਾ ਰੋਗਾ ਗਹ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ, ਤੇ ਚ ਕਦਾਚਿਤ੍ ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਃ ਕਦਾਚਿਦ੍ਦੋਸਜਾਃ| ਤਤ੍ਰ, ਯਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਵਦ੍ਧਪਿਤ੍ਤਸ੍ਯ ਕ੍ਸੀਣਸ਼੍ਲੇਸ੍ਮਣੋ ਭਸ੍ਮਕਾਨਲੇਨ ਬੁਭੁਕ੍ਸਾ ਭਵਤਿ ਸਾ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰ੍ਯਾ ਦੋਸਜਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍, ਪਿਪਾਸਾਪਿ ਯਦਾ ਦੋਸੈਃ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇ ਤਸ੍ਯਾ ਅਪਿ ਦੋਸਤਃ ਪ੍ਰਸਾਧਨਂ ਕਰ੍ਤਵ੍ਯਂ, ਜਰਾਪਿ ਯਦਾਕਾਲੇ ਭਵਤਿ ਸਾ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਕਾਰ੍ਯਾ, ਮਤ੍ਯੁਰਪ੍ਯਕਾਲਜਃ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਕਾਰ੍ਯਃ, ਨਿਦ੍ਰਾਪਿ ਦੋਸਜਾ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਾਦੁਪਸ਼ਮਂ ਯਾਤਿ; ਤਤ੍ਰ ਯਦੈਤੇ ਸਰ੍ਵੇ ਦੋਸੇਭ੍ਯੋ ਜਾਯਨ੍ਤੇ ਤਦਾ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਃ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰ੍ਯਾਸ਼੍ਚ; ਯਦਾ ਤੁ ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਤਸ੍ਤਦਾ ਨਿਸ੍ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਾ ਰਸਾਯਨਤੋਪਿ ਨ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰ੍ਯਾਃ| ਤ ਏਤੇ ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਸਮ੍ਭੂਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ ਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਃ ਕਥ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ| ਯਦ੍ਯਪਿ ਕ੍ਸੁਤ੍ਪਿਪਾਸਾਜਰਾਸੁ ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਸਮ੍ਭੂਤਾਸ੍ਵਪਿ ਪਿਤ੍ਤਜਤ੍ਵਂ ਨਿਦ੍ਰਾਯਾਂ ਸ਼੍ਲੇਸ੍ਮਤਮੋਭਵਤ੍ਵਮਸ੍ਤਿ; ਤਥਾਪ੍ਯਲ੍ਪਦੋਸਾਰਬ੍ਧਤ੍ਵਾਦਦੋਸਜਤ੍ਵਮੁਚ੍ਯਤੇ, ਏਕਤਣ੍ਡੁਲਾਹਾਰਿਣਾਮਨਸ਼ਨਵ੍ਯਪਦੇਸ਼ਵਤ੍| ਮਤ੍ਯੁਸ੍ਤੁ ਮਹਦ੍ਭਿਰਪਿ ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਾਨੁਵਰ੍ਤਿਭਿਰ੍ਦੋਸੈਰਾਰਬ੍ਧੋਪਿ ਨ ਦੋਸਜਵ੍ਯਪਦੇਸ਼ਂ ਲਭਤੇ; ਯਥਾ ਰਾਜਾਨੁਵਰ੍ਤਿਭਿਰ੍ਮਹਦ੍ਭਿਰਪਿ ਪੁਰੁਸੈਃ ਸਮ੍ਪਾਦਿਤਂ ਜਯਾਦਿਕਂ ਰਾਜਵ੍ਯਪਦੇਸ਼ਂ ਲਭਤੇ- ਰਾਜ੍ਞਾ ਜਿਤਮਿਤਿ, ਤਦ੍ਵਦਤ੍ਰਾਪਿ; ਆਗਨ੍ਤੁਮਤ੍ਯੋਃ ਸਮ੍ਭਵਤ੍ਵਾਚ੍ਚ ਨਾਵਸ਼੍ਯਂ ਦੋਸਜਵ੍ਯਪਦੇਸ਼ਂ ਲਭਤੇ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ‘ਨਿਦ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਰਕਤਯ’ ਇਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ‘ਨਿਦ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਰਭਤਯ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ; ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦ੍ਰਾਤ੍ਰਿਜਾਗਰਣਾਦਯ ਇਤਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਯਨ੍ਤਿ||੨੫(੪)||

Meaning of the commentary

Hunger is the wish to eat, thirst the wish to drink, and jara old age. Death is defined as the separation of body, senses, atman, and mind. Sleep is explained through the conjunction of mind with the medhya nadi and the resulting ease of body and senses. The reading prakriti includes conditions arising from constitution or nature. The commentator distinguishes their natural occurrence from their occurrence through disturbed doshas. He gives excessive hunger associated with increased Pitta, reduced Shleshma, and bhasmaka agni as an example of a dosha-caused condition requiring correction. The same distinction is extended to thirst, premature ageing, untimely death, and sleep arising from dosha disturbance. Such cases are assigned to bodily disorders. When the conditions arise through nature itself, he describes them as beyond counteraction, even through Rasayana. The commentary acknowledges that natural hunger, thirst, and ageing can still have a connection with Pitta, and sleep with Shleshma and tamas. It nevertheless calls them non-dosha-caused because dosha involvement is slight, comparing the terminology to calling a person who eats only one grain a person who is fasting. Death, even when substantial doshas participate, is not necessarily named after them if they follow nature; the analogy is that a victory achieved by a king's powerful servants is attributed to the king. Externally caused death is another reason that death cannot always be classified as dosha-caused. An alternative reading has prabhritaya, 'and others,' rather than prakritaya; those accepting it include such conditions as wakefulness at night. The statements about what can be counteracted are the distinctions made in this commentary, not clinical advice or assurances of preventing death.

Key terms

svAbhAvikAH (svābhāvikāḥ)
Naturally arising conditions, distinguished here from similar states produced by disturbed doshas.
jarA (jarā)
Old age, with natural and premature occurrence distinguished in the commentary.
mRutyuH (mṛtyuḥ)
Death, defined as separation of body, senses, atman, and mind.
bhasmakAnalena (bhasmakānalena)
Through the intensely consuming agni invoked in the example of abnormal hunger.

Adhikarana ੩੫ (੨੬) · Śloka ੨੬

ਤ ਏਤੇ ਮਨਃਸ਼ਰੀਰਾਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਾਃ ||੨੬||

View original

त एते मनःशरीराधिष्ठानाः ||२६||

Meaning of the śloka

These disorders have mind and body as their loci.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਵ੍ਯਾਧੀਨਾਮਾਸ਼੍ਰਯਮਾਹ- ਤ ਏਤੇ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਤ ਏਤੇ ਅਨਨ੍ਤਰੋਕ੍ਤਾ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯਃ| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਮਨੋਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਾਃ ਕ੍ਰੋਧਾਦਯਃ, ਸ਼ਰੀਰਾਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਾ ਜ੍ਵਰਾਦਯਃ, ਉਭਯਾਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਾ ਅਪਸ੍ਮਾਰਾਦਯਃ| ਯਦ੍ਯਪਿ ਮਾਨਸਾ ਅਪਿ ਸ਼ਰੀਰਂ ਪੀਡਯਨ੍ਤਿ, ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾ ਅਪਿ ਮਨਃ ਪੀਡਯਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਥਾਪਿ ਪ੍ਰਾਙ੍ਮਾਨਸਾ ਏਵ ਮਨਃ ਪੀਡਯਨ੍ਤਿ ਪਸ਼੍ਚਾਚ੍ਛਰੀਰਮ੍, ਏਵਂ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾ ਅਪਿ, ਇਤਿ ਨ ਦੋਸਃ| ਆਤ੍ਮਨਿ ਤੁ ਵ੍ਯਾਧ੍ਯਧਿਸ੍ਠਾਨਤ੍ਵਂ ਨਾਸ੍ਤਿ, ਨਿਰ੍ਵਿਕਾਰਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍||੨੬||

Meaning of the commentary

The statement refers to the disorders just described. Anger and similar states have mind as their locus, jvara and similar disorders have body as their locus, and conditions such as apasmara involve both. The commentator acknowledges that mental disorders can distress the body and bodily disorders can distress the mind. He preserves the distinction by their initial locus: mental disorders affect the mind first and then the body, while bodily disorders proceed in the reverse order. Atman is not itself a locus of disease because it is regarded as unchanging.

Key terms

manaHsharIrAdhiShThAnAH (manaḥśarīrādhiṣṭhānāḥ)
Having mind and body as their loci.
ubhayAdhiShThAnA (ubhayādhiṣṭhānā)
Having both as their locus, illustrated here by apasmara.
nirvikAratvAt (nirvikāratvāt)
Because of being unchanging, the reason given for excluding atman as the locus of disease.

Adhikarana ੩੬ (੨੭) · Śloka ੨੭

ਤੇਸਾਂ ਸਂਸ਼ੋਧਨਸਂਸ਼ਮਨਾਹਾਰਾਚਾਰਾਃ ਸਮ੍ਯਕ੍ਪ੍ਰਯੁਕ੍ਤਾ ਨਿਗ੍ਰਹਹੇਤਵਃ ||੨੭||

View original

तेषां संशोधनसंशमनाहाराचाराः सम्यक्प्रयुक्ता निग्रहहेतवः ||२७||

Meaning of the śloka

Samshodhana, samshamana, food, and conduct, when properly applied, are means of controlling these disorders.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਵ੍ਯਾਧੀਨ੍ ਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ਼੍ਯ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾਂ ਨਿਰ੍ਦੇਸ੍ਟੁਮਾਹ- ਤੇਸਾਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਤੇਸਾਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਧੀਨਾਮ੍| ਸਮ੍ਯਕ੍ ਸ਼ੋਧਯਤੀਤਿ ਸਂਸ਼ੋਧਨਂ; ਤਦ੍ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਂ ਬਹਿਰਾਸ਼੍ਰਯਮਭ੍ਯਨ੍ਤਰਾਸ਼੍ਰਯਂ ਚ| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਬਹਿਰਾਸ਼੍ਰਯਂ ਸ਼ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਕ੍ਸਾਰਾਗ੍ਨਿਪ੍ਰਲੇਪਾਦਯਃ; ਅਭ੍ਯਨ੍ਤਰਾਸ਼੍ਰਯਂ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਂ- ਵਮਨਂ, ਵਿਰੇਚਨਮ੍, ਆਸ੍ਥਾਪਨਂ, ਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਮੋਕ੍ਸਣਂ ਚ; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਮੋਕ੍ਸਣਮਿਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ਸ਼ਿਰੋਵਿਰੇਚਨਂ ਮਨ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ| ਯਤ੍ ਕਿਞ੍ਚਿਤ੍ ਪੀਤਲੀਢਾਦਿਕਮਨਿਰ੍ਹਤ੍ਯ ਦੋਸਂ ਸ਼ਮਯਤਿ ਤਤ੍ ਸਂਸ਼ਮਨਂ; ਯਦੁਕ੍ਤਂ- “ਨ ਸ਼ੋਧਯਤਿ ਯਦ੍ਦੋਸਾਨ੍ ਸਮਾਨ੍ਨੋਦੀਰਯਤ੍ਯਪਿ| ਸਮੀਕਰੋਤਿ ਕ੍ਰੁਦ੍ਧਾਂਸ਼੍ਚ ਤਤ੍ ਸਂਸ਼ਮਨਮੁਚ੍ਯਤੇ”- ਇਤਿ| ਤਦਪਿ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਂ ਬਾਹ੍ਯਮਾਭ੍ਯਨ੍ਤਰਂ ਚ| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਬਾਹ੍ਯਮਾਲੇਪਪਰਿਸੇਕਾਵਗਾਹਾਭ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਸ਼ਿਰੋਬਸ੍ਤਿਕਵਲਗ੍ਰਹਗਣ੍ਡੂਸਾਦਿਕਮ੍, ਆਭ੍ਯਨ੍ਤਰਂ ਤੁ ਪਾਚਨਲੇਖਨਬਂਹਣਰਸਾਯਨਵਾਜੀਕਰਣਵਿਸਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਨਾਦਿਕਮ੍| ਆਹਾਰਸ਼੍ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਃ, ਪੇਯਲੇਹ੍ਯਾਦ੍ਯਭਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਭੇਦਾਤ੍; ਸ ਪੁਨਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਿਵਿਧਃ- ਦੋਸਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਨੋ, ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਨਃ, ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਵਤ੍ਤਿਕਰਸ਼੍ਚੇਤਿ| ਦੋਸਸਂਸ਼ਮਨਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ ਸਂਸ਼ਮਨਗ੍ਰਹਣੇਨੈਵਾਹਾਰੇ ਲਬ੍ਧੇ ਪਥਕ੍ਕਰਣਂ ਸਂਸ਼ੋਧਨਾਦਿਸ੍ਵਾਹਾਰਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਸੂਚਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍; ਅਥਵਾ ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥੇ ਪੁਰੁਸੇ ਦੋਸਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਾਭਾਵਾਦਾਹਾਰਸ੍ਯ ਪਥਗ੍ਗ੍ਰਹਣਮ੍| ਆਚਾਰਃ ਕਾਯਵਾਙ੍ਮਾਨਸਂ ਕਰ੍ਮ; ਤਤ੍ਰੋਤ੍ਕ੍ਸੇਪਣਾਵਕ੍ਸੇਪਣਾਦਿਕਂ ਕਾਯਿਕਂ ਕਰ੍ਮ, ਪਾਠਸ੍ਵਾਧ੍ਯਾਯਾਦਿ ਵਾਚਿਕਂ, ਧ੍ਯੇਯਚਿਨ੍ਤ੍ਯਸਙ੍ਕਲ੍ਪਾਦਿ ਮਾਨਸਮ੍| ਸਮ੍ਯਕ੍ਪ੍ਰਯੁਕ੍ਤਾ ਇਤਿ ਆਯੁਰਾਦੀਨ੍ ਵੀਕ੍ਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਯੁਕ੍ਤਾਃ||੨੭||

Meaning of the commentary

Samshodhana means thorough cleansing and is divided into external and internal forms. External examples include shastra, kshara, agni, and applications. The internal group is listed as vamana, virechana, asthapana, and bloodletting; another view substitutes shirovirechana for bloodletting. Samshamana pacifies doshas without expelling them. The cited definition adds that it neither removes doshas nor provokes those already balanced, but brings disturbed ones into balance. External examples include applications, pouring, immersion, oil application, shirobasti, kavala, and gandusha. Internal examples include pachana, lekhana, brimhana, Rasayana, Vajikarana, and alleviation of poison. Food is divided into forms that are drunk, licked, eaten, or chewed, and by purpose into food that pacifies doshas, relieves disease, or maintains health. Although pacifying food could fall under samshamana, naming it separately shows its importance in cleansing and other measures. An alternative reason is that food also has a role in healthy people where no pacification of disease is needed. Achara includes actions of body, speech, and mind: raising and lowering are bodily examples, recitation and study are verbal examples, and meditation, reflection, and intention are mental examples. 'Properly applied' means used after considering ayus and other relevant features of the person.

Key terms

saMshodhanaM (saṃśodhanaṃ)
Thorough cleansing, divided here into external and internal forms.
saMshamanaM (saṃśamanaṃ)
Pacification of disturbed doshas without expelling them or provoking balanced doshas.
AhAraH (āhāraḥ)
Food, considered here by mode of intake and purpose.
AcAraH (ācāraḥ)
Conduct involving body, speech, and mind.

Adhikarana ੩੭ (੨੮) · Śloka ੨੮

ਪ੍ਰਾਣਿਨਾਂ ਪੁਨਰ੍ਮੂਲਮਾਹਾਰੋ ਬਲਵਰ੍ਣੌਜਸਾਂ ਚ | ਸ ਸਟ੍ਸੁ ਰਸੇਸ੍ਵਾਯਤ੍ਤਃ; ਰਸਾਃ ਪੁਨਰ੍ਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਾਸ਼੍ਰਯਾਃ; ਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਾਣਿ ਪੁਨਰੋਸਧਯਃ | ਤਾਸ੍ਤੁ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਾਃ- ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਾ ਜਙ੍ਗਮਾਸ਼੍ਚ ||੨੮||

View original

प्राणिनां पुनर्मूलमाहारो बलवर्णौजसां च | स षट्सु रसेष्वायत्तः; रसाः पुनर्द्रव्याश्रयाः; द्रव्याणि पुनरोषधयः | तास्तु द्विविधाः- स्थावरा जङ्गमाश्च ||२८||

Meaning of the śloka

Food is the root of living beings and of their strength, complexion, and ojas. It depends on the six rasas; rasas reside in substances. The substances being discussed are aushadhis, which are divided into stationary and moving kinds.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਸਂਸ਼ੋਧਨਾਦਿਸ੍ਵਾਹਾਰਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਂ ਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਪ੍ਰਾਣਿਨਾਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਮੂਲਮਿਤਿ ਮੂਲਮਿਵ ਮੂਲਂ, ਸਮ੍ਭਵਹੇਤੁਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍; ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਂ ਤਾਵਦਾਹਾਰਾਦੇਵ ਜਾਯਤੇ ਯਦ੍ਗਰ੍ਭਜਨਨਸਮਰ੍ਥਮ੍| ਨ ਕੇਵਲਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਿਨਾਂ ਮੂਲਂ ਬਲਵਰ੍ਣੋਜਸਾਂ ਚ| ਏਤੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਿਨਾਮਾਹਾਰਾਦੇਵੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਸ੍ਥਿਤੀ ਨਿਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਿਤੇ| ਬਲਂ ਕਰ੍ਮਸਾਧਨਸ਼ਕ੍ਤਿਰ੍ਵ੍ਯਾਯਾਮਾਨੁਮੇਯਾ, ਵਰ੍ਣੋ ਗੌਰਾਦਿਃ, ਓਜਃ ਸੋਮਾਤ੍ਮਕਂ ਰਸਾਦਿਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਾਨ੍ਤਸਰ੍ਵਧਾਤੁਧਾਮਭੂਤਂ ਹਦਿਸ੍ਥਮ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਬਲਂ ਸ਼ਰੀਰੋਪਚਯੋਤ੍ਰਾਭਿਪ੍ਰੇਤ ਇਤਿ ਵਦਨ੍ਤਿ| ਏਵਂ ਪਰਮਾਰ੍ਥਤੋ ਬਲੌਜਸੋਰ੍ਭੇਦੇਪਿ ਦੋਸਧਾਤੁਮਲਕ੍ਸਯਵਦ੍ਧਿਵਿਜ੍ਞਾਨੀਯੇ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸੈਕ੍ਯਾਰ੍ਥਮਭੇਦ ਉਕ੍ਤਃ| ਸ ਸਟ੍ਸੁ ਰਸੇਸ੍ਵਾਯਤ੍ਤ ਇਤਿ ਸ ਆਹਾਰਃ, ਰਸੇਸੁ ਮਧੁਰਾਦਿਸੁ, ਆਯਤ੍ਤਃ ਅਧੀਨਃ| ਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਾਣਿ ਪੁਨਰੋਸਧਯ ਇਤਿ ਓਸਧਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋਤ੍ਰ ਸਾਨ੍ਨਿਧ੍ਯਾਦ੍ ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਮਾਣਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਰਾਸ਼ਿਦ੍ਵਯ ਏਵ ਵਰ੍ਤਤੇ, ਨ ਪੁਨਰ੍ਯਾਵਦੋਸਧਿਮਾਤ੍ਰੇ; ਅਨ੍ਯਥਾ ਹਿ ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵੇਸ੍ਵਪ੍ਯੋਸਧਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋ ਵਰ੍ਤਤ ਇਤਿ ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਾਨਾਮੁਪਾਦਾਨਂ ਪਥਙ੍ਗ ਸ੍ਯਾਤ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵੇਸ੍ਵਪਿ ਓਸਧਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋ ਵਰ੍ਤਤ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਹੁਃ| ਤਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਤਾ ਇਤਿ ਓਸਧਯਃ| ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਾਣਾਂ ਬਹੁਤਰੋਪਯੋਗਾਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਾਗੁਪਾਦਾਨਮ੍||੨੮||

Meaning of the commentary

Calling food the root highlights it as a cause of coming into being: the shukra and shonita capable of forming an embryo are themselves said to arise from food. Food is also the root of strength, complexion, and ojas, so both the arising and maintenance of living beings are indicated. Bala is the capacity to perform action, inferred through exertion. Varna includes complexion such as a fair colour. Ojas is described as Soma-like, situated in the heart, and as the seat of all dhatus from rasa through shukra. Another interpretation takes bala here to mean bodily development. Although bala and ojas are thus distinguished, they are treated as one elsewhere for a shared therapeutic purpose. Food depends on the six rasas beginning with madhura. Aushadhi here is understood from the context to cover the two forthcoming groups, stationary and moving, rather than every substance that can be used as medicine; otherwise the separately introduced earthy substances would already be included. Another view does include earthy substances within the term aushadhi. The stationary group is named first because it is used more extensively.

Key terms

balaM (balaṃ)
Capacity for action, inferred from exertion; alternatively bodily development in this context.
ojaH (ojaḥ)
The Soma-like, heart-situated principle described as the seat of the dhatus.
rasAH (rasāḥ)
The six tastes on which food is said to depend.
oShadhayaH (oṣadhayaḥ)
The medicinal substances discussed here, with differing views on whether earthy substances are included.

Adhikarana ੩੮ (੨੯) · Śloka ੨੯

ਤਾਸਾਂ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਾਸ਼੍ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਾਃ- ਵਨਸ੍ਪਤਯੋ, ਵਕ੍ਸਾ, ਵੀਰੁਧ, ਓਸਧਯ ਇਤਿ | ਤਾਸੁ, ਅਪੁਸ੍ਪਾਃ ਫਲਵਨ੍ਤੋ ਵਨਸ੍ਪਤਯਃ, ਪੁਸ੍ਪਫਲਵਨ੍ਤੋ ਵਕ੍ਸਾਃ, ਪ੍ਰਤਾਨਵਤ੍ਯਃ ਸ੍ਤਮ੍ਬਿਨ੍ਯਸ਼੍ਚ ਵੀਰੁਧਃ, ਫਲਪਾਕਨਿਸ੍ਠਾ ਓਸਧਯ ਇਤਿ ||੨੯||

View original

तासां स्थावराश्चतुर्विधाः- वनस्पतयो, वृक्षा, वीरुध, ओषधय इति | तासु, अपुष्पाः फलवन्तो वनस्पतयः, पुष्पफलवन्तो वृक्षाः, प्रतानवत्यः स्तम्बिन्यश्च वीरुधः, फलपाकनिष्ठा ओषधय इति ||२९||

Meaning of the śloka

The stationary group has four divisions: vanaspati, vriksha, virudh, and oshadhi. In this classification, vanaspatis bear fruit without flowers, vrikshas bear both flowers and fruit, virudhs spread or form clumps, and oshadhis reach their end when their fruit ripens.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਤਾਸਾਮਿਤਿ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਾਨਾਮੋਸਧੀਨਾਂ ਮਧ੍ਯੇ| ਕੇ ਤੇ ਚਤ੍ਵਾਰਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਵਨਸ੍ਪਤਯ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਤਾਨੇਵ ਵਿਵਰਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਤਾਸ੍ਵਿਤਿ; ਤਾਸੁ ਮਧ੍ਯੇ| ਅਪੁਸ੍ਪਾ ਇਤਿ ਅਵਿਦ੍ਯਮਾਨਪੁਸ੍ਪਾਃ, ਫਲਵਨ੍ਤ ਇਤਿ ਫਲਂ ਯੇਸਾਮਸ੍ਤਿ ਤੇ ਵਨਸ੍ਪਤਯ ਇਤਿ; ਕੇ ਪੁਨਰੀਦਸ਼ਾਃ? ਪ੍ਲਕ੍ਸੋਦੁਮ੍ਬਰਾਦਯਃ| ਪੁਸ੍ਪਫਲਵਨ੍ਤੋ ਵਕ੍ਸਾ ਇਤਿ ਉਭਯਯੁਕ੍ਤਾ ਵਕ੍ਸਾਃ; ਕੇ ਤੇ? ਆਮ੍ਰਜਮ੍ਬੂਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ| ਪ੍ਰਤਾਨਵਤ੍ਯ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਪ੍ਰਤਾਨਵਤ੍ਯੋ ਵਿਸ੍ਤਾਰਵਤ੍ਯਃ ਵੀਰੁਧਃ, ਨ ਕੇਵਲਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਾਨਵਤ੍ਯੋ ਵੀਰੁਧਃਸ੍ਤਮ੍ਬਿਨ੍ਯਸ਼੍ਚ ਗੁਲ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਯਸ਼੍ਚ, ਗੁਲ੍ਮਃ ਪੁਨਃ ਵਰ੍ਤੁਲਲਤਾਸਨ੍ਤਤਿਵਿਟਪਃ , ਤਾਸ਼੍ਚ ਵਿਦਾਰੀਕੋਲਵਲ੍ਲੀਸ਼ਾਲਪਰ੍ਣੀਪਸ਼੍ਨਿਪਰ੍ਣੀਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ| ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ‘ਸ੍ਤਮ੍ਬਿਨ੍ਯਸ਼੍ਚ’ ਇਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ‘ਗੁਲ੍ਮਿਨ੍ਯਸ਼੍ਚ’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ, ਤਤ੍ਰਾਪਿ ਸ ਏਵਾਰ੍ਥਃ| ਫਲਪਾਕਨਿਸ੍ਟਾ ਇਤਿ ਨਿਸ੍ਠਾ ਨਾਸ਼ਃ, ਫਲਪਾਕੇਨ ਪਰਿਣਤ੍ਯਾ ਨਾਸ਼ੋ ਯਾਸਾਂ ਤਾਸ੍ਤਥੋਕ੍ਤਾਃ; ਤੇ ਪੁਨਰ੍ਗੋਧੂਮਾਦਯਃ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਨਿਸ੍ਠਾਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਂ ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯੇਕਂ ਸਮ੍ਬਧ੍ਨਨ੍ਤਿ, ਫਲਨਿਸ੍ਠਾਃ ਪਾਕਨਿਸ੍ਠਾ ਇਤਿ; ਤਤ੍ਰ ਫਲਨਿਸ੍ਠਾਃ ਸ਼ਾਲਿਤਿਲਕੁਲਤ੍ਥਾਦਯਃ, ਪਾਕਨਿਸ੍ਠਾਃ ਕਵਕਾਦਯਃ; ਕਵਕਸ਼੍ਛਤ੍ਰਕ ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ||੨੯||

Meaning of the commentary

Vanaspatis are explained as fruit-bearing plants with no flowers apparent in this description, exemplified by plaksha and udumbara. Vrikshas have both flowers and fruits, with mango and jambu as examples. Virudhs include spreading growth and clumping or bush-like growth; examples are vidari, kolavalli, shalaparni, and prishniparni. A variant reads gulminyah in place of stambinyah, with the same sense of clumping growth. For oshadhi, nishtha is explained as destruction or coming to an end: these plants perish as their fruit matures, as in wheat and similar plants. Another interpretation connects nishtha separately with phala and paka, distinguishing those whose life ends with fruit, such as shali, sesame, and kulattha, from those ending with maturation, such as kavaka, glossed as a mushroom. The alternatives belong to the botanical grouping used by the text.

Key terms

vanaspatayaH (vanaspatayaḥ)
Fruit-bearing plants described in this scheme as lacking flowers.
vRukShAH (vṛkṣāḥ)
Plants bearing both flowers and fruits in this classification.
vIrudhaH (vīrudhaḥ)
Spreading or clumping plants.
phalapAkaniShThA (phalapākaniṣṭhā)
Ending at fruit maturation, with an alternative grammatical interpretation also recorded.

Adhikarana ੩੯ (੩੦) · Śloka ੩੦

ਜਙ੍ਗਮਾ ਖਲ੍ਵਪਿ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਾਃ- ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾਣ੍ਡਜਸ੍ਵੇਦਜੋਦ੍ਭਿਜ੍ਜਾਃ | ਤਤ੍ਰ ਪਸ਼ੁਮਨੁਸ੍ਯਵ੍ਯਾਲਾਦਯੋ ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾਃ, ਖਗਸਰ੍ਪਸਰੀਸਪਪ੍ਰਭਤਯੋਣ੍ਡਜਾਃ, ਕਮਿਕੀਟਪਿਪੀਲਿਕਾਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ ਸ੍ਵੇਦਜਾਃ, ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਗੋਪਮਣ੍ਡੂਕਪ੍ਰਭਤਯ ਉਦ੍ਭਿਜ੍ਜਾਃ ||੩੦||

View original

जङ्गमा खल्वपि चतुर्विधाः- जरायुजाण्डजस्वेदजोद्भिज्जाः | तत्र पशुमनुष्यव्यालादयो जरायुजाः, खगसर्पसरीसृपप्रभृतयोऽण्डजाः, कृमिकीटपिपीलिकाप्रभृतयः स्वेदजाः, इन्द्रगोपमण्डूकप्रभृतय उद्भिज्जाः ||३०||

Meaning of the śloka

The moving group is also divided into four traditional classes: jarayuja, andaja, svedaja, and udbhijja. Animals, human beings, and vyalas are placed under jarayuja; birds, snakes, and other creeping creatures under andaja; krimis, kitas, and ants under svedaja; and indragopa, frogs, and similar creatures under udbhijja.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਜਙ੍ਗਮਾਃ ਖਲ੍ਵਪੀਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ|- ਖਲੁਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਯਸਮ੍ਬੋਧਨੇ, ਹੇ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤ, ਜਙ੍ਗਮਾ ਅਪਿ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਾਃ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਾਃ| ਤਾਨਾਹ- ਜਰਾਯੁਜੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਏਤਚ੍ਚ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤਮ੍| ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾਦਿਸੁ ਪੂਰ੍ਵੋਕ੍ਤਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜਾਦਿਕ੍ਰਮਤ੍ਯਾਗੋ ਯੋਨਿਸਙ੍ਕਰਂ ਬੋਧਯਤਿ; ਤੇਨ ਪਕ੍ਸਿਸੁ ਬਲਾਕਾ ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾ ਅਣ੍ਡਜਾ ਚੇਤਿ, ਸਰ੍ਪਜਾਤਿਸੁ ਅਹਿਪਤਾਕਾ ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾ, ਸਂਸ੍ਵੇਦਜੇਸ੍ਵਪਿ ਕਾਸ਼੍ਚਿਤ੍ ਪਿਪੀਲਿਕਾ ਅਣ੍ਡਜਾ ਉਦ੍ਭਿਜ੍ਜਾਸ਼੍ਚ| ਵ੍ਯਾਲਾਦਯ ਇਤਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਲਾ ਹਿਂਸ੍ਰਪਸ਼ੁਵ੍ਯਾਘ੍ਰਾਦਯਃ, ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਪਸ਼ੁਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦੇਵ ਹਿਂਸ੍ਰਪਸ਼ੂਨਾਮਪਿ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਮਿਤਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਲਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਸਰ੍ਪਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਮਾਹੁਃ| ਤਦੁਕ੍ਤਂ- ‘‘ਸਰ੍ਪਜਾਤਿਸੁ ਅਹਿਪਤਾਕਾ ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾ”- ਇਤਿ| ਆਦਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦ੍ ਬਲਾਕਾਜਤੁਕਾਦਯਃ| ਇਹੋਪਕਰਣਪ੍ਰਸ੍ਤਾਵੇ ਪਸ਼ੂਨਾਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਮਿਤਿ ਪ੍ਰਾਙ੍ਨਿਰ੍ਦੇਸ਼ਃ, ਪ੍ਰਾਗ੍ਭੂਤਗ੍ਰਾਮਪ੍ਰਸਙ੍ਗੇਨ ਪੁਰੁਸਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਖ੍ਯਾਪਨਾਰ੍ਥਮ੍, ਅਤ੍ਰ ਪੁਨਰ੍ਜਰਾਯੁਜਾਣ੍ਡਜੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਪਾਠ ਓਸਧਿਤ੍ਵਖ੍ਯਾਪਨਾਯੇਤਿ ਨ ਪੌਨਰੁਕ੍ਤ੍ਯਮ੍| ਖਗਸਰ੍ਪੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਖਗਾਃ ਪਕ੍ਸਿਣਃ, ਸਰ੍ਪਾ ਮਨ੍ਦਗਾਮਿਨੋਜਗਰਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ, ਸਰੀਸਪਾਃ ਸ਼ੀਘ੍ਰਗਾਮਿਨਃ ਕਸ੍ਣਸਰ੍ਪਾਦਯਃ, ਮੀਨਮਕਰਾਦਯੋ ਵਾ; ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਤ੍ ਕੂਰ੍ਮਨਕ੍ਰਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਂ; ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਮਪਠਿਤ੍ਵਾ ਲੁਪ੍ਤਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟੇਨਾਦਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਕੂਰ੍ਮਾਦੀਨ੍ ਗਹ੍ਣਨ੍ਤਿ| ਕਮਿਕੀਟੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਕਮਯਃ ਕੋਸ੍ਠਪੁਰੀਸਾਦਿਬਾਸ੍ਪਸਮ੍ਭਵਾਃ, ਕੀਟਾ ਵਸ਼੍ਚਿਕਸਙ੍ਬਿਨ੍ਦੁਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ, ਪਿਪੀਲਿਕਾਸ਼੍ਚਿਟਿਕਾਃ, ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦੇਵਂਵਿਧਾ ਅਨ੍ਯੇਪਿ ਦਸ਼੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ| ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਗੋਪ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਗੋਪਾਃ ਪ੍ਰਾਵਟ੍ਕਾਲਜਾ ਅਤਿਰਕ੍ਤਕਮਯਃ ‘ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਵਧੂ’ ਇਤਿ ਲੋਕੇ, ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦੀਦਸ਼ਾ ਅਨ੍ਯੇਪਿ||੩੦||

Meaning of the commentary

The four classes have been explained earlier. Their changed order here is taken to indicate overlap between modes of origin. The commentary cites balaka as both jarayuja and andaja, ahipataka among snakes as jarayuja, and some ants as andaja or udbhijja even though ants appear in the svedaja list. These are the source's traditional classifications. Vyala is explained as a fierce animal such as a tiger. Another interpretation says that fierce animals are already covered by pashu, so vyala denotes a particular snake; it cites ahipataka in support. 'And others' includes balaka and jatuka. Animals are named first because the present discussion concerns useful resources. The earlier classification established human primacy, whereas this one explains their role as aushadhi, so the repetition serves a different purpose. Khaga means birds. Sarpa is explained as a slow-moving kind such as an ajagara, and sarisripa as a fast-moving kind such as a krishna-sarpa; another interpretation includes fish and makara in the latter. The list also includes turtles and nakra, either through the written 'and others' or through an understood omitted expression. Krimis are described as arising from the vapour or warmth of the abdomen, faeces, and similar sites. Kitas include scorpions and shadbindu, and pipilikas are ants. Indragopas are the intensely red small creatures appearing in the early rainy season and popularly called indravadhu. The open-ended terms extend each group to comparable examples.

Key terms

jarAyujAH (jarāyujāḥ)
The womb-born group in the traditional classification.
aNDajAH (aṇḍajāḥ)
The egg-born group.
svedajAH (svedajāḥ)
The group traditionally described as arising from moisture or warmth.
udbhijjAH (udbhijjāḥ)
The group traditionally described as emerging by breaking through the earth.
yonisa~gkaraM (yonisaṅkaraṃ)
Overlap of categories of origin, used to explain the changed order and mixed examples.

Adhikarana ੪੦ (੩੧) · Śloka ੩੧

ਤਤ੍ਰ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰੇਭ੍ਯਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਕ੍ਪਤ੍ਰਪੁਸ੍ਪਫਲਮੂਲਕਨ੍ਦਨਿਰ੍ਯਾਸਸ੍ਵਰਸਾਦਯਃ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਵਨ੍ਤਃ; ਜਙ੍ਗਮੇਭ੍ਯਸ਼੍ਚਰ੍ਮਨਖਰੋਮਰੁਧਿਰਾਦਯਃ ||੩੧||

View original

तत्र स्थावरेभ्यस्त्वक्पत्रपुष्पफलमूलकन्दनिर्यासस्वरसादयः प्रयोजनवन्तः; जङ्गमेभ्यश्चर्मनखरोमरुधिरादयः ||३१||

Meaning of the śloka

Useful materials from the stationary group include bark, leaves, flowers, fruits, roots, underground storage parts, exudates, and expressed juices. From the moving group they include skin, nails, hair, blood, and other materials.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਯੋਰ੍ਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟਯੋਸ਼੍ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸੋਪਯੋਗਿਨੋਵਯਵਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਾਨ੍ ਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਤਤ੍ਰ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰੇਭ੍ਯ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਸ੍ਵਰਸਾਦਯ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਤ੍ਤੈਲਕ੍ਸਾਰਭਸ੍ਮਕਣ੍ਟਕਪ੍ਰਭਤੀਨਾਂ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਮ੍| ਕੇਚਿਤ੍ ਕਨ੍ਦਂ ਸੂਤ੍ਰੇ ਨ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ, ਆਦਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਾਚ੍ਚ ਗਹ੍ਣਨ੍ਤਿ| ਰੋਮਰੁਧਿਰਾਦਯ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਾਨ੍ਮਾਂਸਵਸਾਘਤਾਸ੍ਥਿਖੁਰਾਦਯਃ||੩੧||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator identifies additional parts and products included by 'and others.' In the stationary group these include oil, kshara, ash, and thorns. Some readings omit kanda from the explicit list but include it through the open-ended expression. In the moving group, the expression extends the list to flesh, fat, ghee, bones, hooves, and similar materials.

Key terms

niryAsa (niryāsa)
Exudate from a plant, listed among useful materials.
svarasa
Expressed juice of the source material.
kandaM (kandaṃ)
An underground storage part, explicitly named in some readings and implicitly included in others.

Adhikarana ੪੧ (੩੨) · Śloka ੩੨

ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਾਃ ਸੁਵਰ੍ਣਰਜਤਮਣਿਮੁਕ੍ਤਾਮਨਃਸ਼ਿਲਾਮਤ੍ਕਪਾਲਾਦਯਃ ||੩੨||

View original

पार्थिवाः सुवर्णरजतमणिमुक्तामनःशिलामृत्कपालादयः ||३२||

Meaning of the śloka

The earthy group includes gold, silver, gems, pearls, manahshila, clay, potsherds, and similar substances.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਰਸਾਧਿਕਾਰਿਕਮੌਸਧਿਵਰ੍ਗਂ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦ੍ਯ, ਪਰਿਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਟਂ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਯਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਪਥਿਵ੍ਯਾ ਵਿਕਾਰਾਃ ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਾਃ, ਰਜਤਂ ਰੌਪ੍ਯਂ, ਮਣਿਃ ਸ੍ਫਟਿਕਾਦਿਃ, ਮੁਕ੍ਤਾ ਮੌਕ੍ਤਿਕਂ, ਮਤ੍ ਮਤ੍ਤਿਕਾ, ਕਪਾਲਂ ਕਰ੍ਪਰਮ੍| ਸੁਵਰ੍ਣਸ੍ਯੇਹ ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਤ੍ਵਮੇਵਾਙ੍ਗੀਕ੍ਰਿਯਤੇ ਗੁਰੁਤ੍ਵਕਾਠਿਨ੍ਯਸ੍ਥੈਰ੍ਯਾਦਿਹੇਤੁਭਿਃ| ਸੂਤ੍ਰੇ ਆਦਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਲ੍ਲੋਹਮਲਸਿਕਤਾਸੁਧਾਹਰਿਤਾਲਲਵਣਗੈਰਿਕਰਸਾਞ੍ਜਨਪ੍ਰਭਤੀਨਾਂ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਮ੍| ਯਦ੍ਯਪਿ ਸ੍ਥਿਤਿਸ਼ੀਲਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ਤਥਾ ਲੋਕਦ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਵਸਮਾਖ੍ਯਾਨੇਪਥਗੁਕ੍ਤਤ੍ਵਾਚ੍ਚ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨੈਵ ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਾ ਉਚ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ, ਤਥਾਪ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ਪ੍ਰਕਰਣਾਦ੍ਯੇਸ੍ਵਾਹਾਰੋਪਯੋਗਿਤ੍ਵਂ ਫਲਮੂਲਾਦ੍ਯਵਯਵੇਸੁ ਰਸਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਤਯਾ ਤਤ੍ਰੈਵ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧੇ ਵਨਸ੍ਪਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਗਣੇ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋ ਵਰ੍ਤਤੇ ਨ ਤੁ ਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵੇਸ੍ਵਪਿ, ਤੇਸਾਮਾਹਾਰੇਸੁ ਪ੍ਰਾਯੇਣਾਨੁਪਯੋਗਾਤ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯਦਪਿ ਸਮਾਧਾਨਾਨ੍ਤਰਮਸ੍ਤਿ, ਤਚ੍ਚ ਵਿਸ੍ਤਰਭਯਾਨ੍ਨ ਲਿਖਿਤਮ੍||੩੨||

Meaning of the commentary

After the stationary and moving groups, the remaining category is introduced as parthiva, substances regarded as products of earth. Rajata means silver, mani includes substances such as crystal, mukta means pearl, mrit means clay, and kapala means a potsherd. Gold is classified as earthy here on account of heaviness, hardness, stability, and related qualities. The open-ended list also includes lohamala, sand, sudha, haritala, salt, gairika, and rasanjana. The commentator considers why this group is separate when earthy things could fall under stationary things in the earlier twofold division of the world. He explains that sthavara in the present context denotes the four plant groups whose fruits, roots, and similar parts serve as food and are discussed with rasa foremost. Earthy substances generally do not serve that dietary role and are therefore listed separately. He mentions that another resolution exists but omits it to avoid excessive length.

Key terms

pArthivAH (pārthivāḥ)
The substances classified here as products of earth.
maNiH (maṇiḥ)
A gem or mineral substance, with crystal given as an example.
kapAlaM (kapālaṃ)
A potsherd or earthen fragment.

Adhikarana ੪੨ (੩੩) · Śloka ੩੩

ਕਾਲਕਤਾਃਪ੍ਰਵਾਤਨਿਵਾਤਾਤਪਚ੍ਛਾਯਾਜ੍ਯੋਤ੍ਸ੍ਨਾਤਮਃਸ਼ੀਤੋਸ੍ਣਵਰ੍ਸਾਹੋਰਾਤ੍ਰਪਕ੍ਸਮਾਸਰ੍ਤ੍ਵਯਨਾਦਯਃ ਸਂਵਤ੍ਸਰਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਾਃ ||੩੩||

View original

कालकृताःप्रवातनिवातातपच्छायाज्योत्स्नातमःशीतोष्णवर्षाहोरात्रपक्षमासर्त्वयनादयः संवत्सरविशेषाः ||३३||

Meaning of the śloka

Conditions and divisions associated with time include exposure to wind and shelter from wind, sunlight and shade, moonlight and darkness, cold and heat, rain, day and night, fortnights, months, seasons, half-years, and other distinctions within the year.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਕਾਲਕਤਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਆਦਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਨ੍ਨਿਮੇਸਕਾਸ੍ਠਾਕਲਾਮੁਹੂਰ੍ਤਾਦਯਃ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤ੍ਵੇਤਦ੍ਗਦ੍ਯਮਨ੍ਯਥਾ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਯਨ੍ਤਿ ਚ; ਤਚ੍ਚ ਵਰ੍ਤਮਾਨਪ੍ਰਤਿਸ੍ਵਪ੍ਰਸਿਦ੍ਧਮਿਤ੍ਯਸ੍ਮਾਭਿਰੁਪੇਕ੍ਸਿਤਮ੍||੩੩||

Meaning of the commentary

The phrase 'and others' includes smaller measures of time such as nimesha, kashtha, kala, and muhurta. The commentator says that others read and explain this prose passage differently, but he does not reproduce those versions because they are not familiar in the copies available to him.

Key terms

kAlakRutAH (kālakṛtāḥ)
Conditions or distinctions brought about by or associated with time.
ayana
A half-year division included among the temporal measures.
saMvatsaravisheShAH (saṃvatsaraviśeṣāḥ)
The differing conditions and divisions of the year.

Adhikarana ੪੩ (੩੪) · Śloka ੩੪

ਤ ਏਤੇ ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਤ ਏਵ ਦੋਸਾਣਾਂ ਸਞ੍ਚਯਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਹੇਤਵਃ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਵਨ੍ਤਸ਼੍ਚ ||੩੪||

View original

त एते स्वभावत एव दोषाणां सञ्चयप्रकोपप्रशमप्रतीकारहेतवः प्रयोजनवन्तश्च ||३४||

Meaning of the śloka

These factors, through their own characteristics, cause the accumulation, aggravation, natural subsidence, or counteraction of doshas, and they have practical uses in treatment.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਏਸਾਂ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਂ ਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਤ ਏਤ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵਤ ਏਵੇਤਿ ਸ੍ਵਲਕ੍ਸਣਤ ਏਵ| ਦੂਸਯਨ੍ਤਿ ਕਾਯਵਾਕ੍ਚਿਤ੍ਤਾਨੀਤਿ ਦੋਸਾ ਵਾਤਾਦਯਃ; ਤਦਾਰਬ੍ਧਾਸ਼੍ਚ ਜ੍ਵਰਾਦਯਃ| ਸਞ੍ਚਯਃ ਸ੍ਥਾਨਵਦ੍ਧਿਃ; ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਣਂ ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਃ, ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਪ੍ਰਸਰਸ੍ਥਾਨਸਂਸ਼੍ਰਯਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤਿਭੇਦਾਃ ਪਞ੍ਚੋਚ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ; ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਃ ਸ੍ਥਾਨਾਦੁਨ੍ਮਾਰ੍ਗਗਮਨਂ; ਪ੍ਰਸਰਃ ਪਞ੍ਚਦਸ਼ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰੋ ਵ੍ਰਣਪ੍ਰਸ਼੍ਨੇ ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਤੇ; ਜ੍ਵਰਾਤੀਸਾਰਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਸਾਮਾਨ੍ਯਲਕ੍ਸਣਂ ਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤਿਃ, ਯਥਾ- ਸਨ੍ਤਾਪਲਕ੍ਸਣੋ ਜ੍ਵਰਃ, ਸਰਣਲਕ੍ਸਣੋਤਿਸਾਰ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ; ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਣਂ ਭੇਦਃ, ਯਥਾ- ਅਸ੍ਟੌ ਜ੍ਵਰਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ; ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਨਂ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਃ ਸ੍ਵਯਮੁਪਸ਼ਮਃ; ਹੇਤੁਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਵਿਪਰੀਤਂ ਕਰ੍ਮ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਃ; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਯੋਰੇਕਾਰ੍ਥਤਾਂ ਮਨ੍ਯਮਾਨਾਃ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਂ ਨ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਨ੍ਨ, ਯਸ੍ਮਾਜ੍ਜ੍ਵਰਾਦੀਨਾਮਪ੍ਯਸ੍ਤਿ ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵੋਪਸ਼ਮਃ; ਤਦ੍ਯਥਾ- ਕਫਜ੍ਵਰਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰੋ ਵਸਨ੍ਤੇ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਾਹ੍ਣੇ ਚ, ਸ੍ਵਭਾਵੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਸ੍ਤੁ ਗ੍ਰੀਸ੍ਮੇ ਮਧ੍ਯਾਹ੍ਨੇ ਚੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ; ਤਸ੍ਮਾਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਨਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਾਰਯੋਰਰ੍ਥਭੇਦੋਸ੍ਤ੍ਯੇਵ| ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਵਨ੍ਤਸ਼੍ਚੇਤਿ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸੋਪਕਾਰਿਣ ਇਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਤਦ੍ਯਥਾ ‘ਲਾਜੋਤ੍ਪਲੋਸ਼ੀਰਕੁਚਨ੍ਦਨਾਨਿ ਦਤ੍ਤ੍ਵਾ ਪ੍ਰਵਾਤੇ ਨਿਸ਼ਿ ਵਾਸਯੇਚ੍ਚ’ (ਉ. ਤ. ਅ. ੪੮); ਤਥਾ ‘ਨਿਵਾਤੇ ਦੇਸ਼ੇ ਨਿਚਿਤਂ ਕਤ੍ਵਾ’ (ਸੂ. ਅ. ੧੧), ਤਥਾ ‘ਮਦਨਫਲਾਨਾਮਾਤਪਪਰਿਸ਼ੁਸ੍ਕਾਣਾਂ’- (ਸੂ. ਅ. ੪੩) ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਂ ਜ੍ਞਾਤਵ੍ਯਮ੍||੩੪||

Meaning of the commentary

Svabhavata means through their own defining characteristics. Dosha refers to Vata and the other factors that disturb body, speech, and mind, and also to disorders such as jvara arising from them. Sanchaya is increase in a dosha's own location. Prakopa is used broadly here to include prakopa, prasara, sthanasamshraya, vyakti, and bheda. Prakopa itself is described as movement away from the normal location along an improper course; fifteen forms of prasara are to be described later. Vyakti is the general manifestation of a disease, as heat characterises jvara and frequent passage characterises atisara. Bheda is its specific differentiation, such as the eight kinds of jvara. Prashama means subsiding of itself, whereas pratikara means action opposed to the cause and the disease. Some omit pratikara, treating the two words as equivalent. The commentator rejects that view: kapha-jvara may require counteraction in spring or the forenoon but subside naturally in summer or at midday. Thus natural subsidence and active counteraction are distinguished. The factors are useful in treatment as well. The commentary cites examples involving leaving a preparation in wind at night, arranging material in a sheltered place, and drying madana fruits in sunlight, to show how the previously listed environmental conditions can be put to use.

Key terms

sa~jcayaH (sañcayaḥ)
Increase of a dosha in its own location.
vyaktiH (vyaktiḥ)
The recognisable general manifestation of a disease.
bhedaH (bhedaḥ)
Differentiation into specific disease forms.
prashamaH (praśamaḥ)
Subsidence occurring of itself, distinguished here from active treatment.
pratIkAraH (pratīkāraḥ)
Action directed against a cause and disease.

Adhikarana ੪੪ (੩੫) · Śloka ੩੫

ਭਵਨ੍ਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕਾਃ- ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਣਾਂ ਵਿਕਾਰਾਣਾਮੇਸ ਵਰ੍ਗਸ਼੍ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਃ | ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪੇ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮੇ ਚੈਵ ਹੇਤੁਰੁਕ੍ਤਸ਼੍ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਕੈਃ ||੩੫||

View original

भवन्ति चात्र श्लोकाः- शारीराणां विकाराणामेष वर्गश्चतुर्विधः | प्रकोपे प्रशमे चैव हेतुरुक्तश्चिकित्सकैः ||३५||

Meaning of the śloka

Physicians describe this fourfold group as a cause both of aggravation and of alleviation of bodily disorders.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਂ ਗਦ੍ਯੇ ਵਿਸ੍ਤਰੇਣ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਿਤਮਰ੍ਥਂ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕੈਃ ਪ੍ਰਕਟੀਕੁਰ੍ਵਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਭਵਨ੍ਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਯਦ੍ਯਪਿ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤੇ ਭਵਨ੍ਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰੇਤਿ ਵਿਨਾਪਿ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕਾ ਭਵਨ੍ਤਿ, ਤਥਾਪ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ਮਨ੍ਦਮਤੀਨਾਂ ਗਦ੍ਯਪਦ੍ਯਭੇਦਕਥਨਾਯ ਭਵਨ੍ਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕਾ ਇਤਿ ਕਤਮ੍; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਵੇਦਾਦਿਧਰ੍ਮਸਂਵਾਦਾਰ੍ਥਮਿਤਿ ਵਦਨ੍ਤਿ| ਅਥ ਕੇ ਤੇ ਸ਼੍ਲੋਕਾ ਇਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਣਾਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਨ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ ਦ੍ਵਿਰੁਕ੍ਤਿਃ, ਪੂਰ੍ਵੋਕ੍ਤਸ੍ਯ ਗੂਢਾਰ੍ਥਸ੍ਯਾਭਿਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤਿਕਰਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ | ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਣਾਮਿਤਿ ਸ਼ਰੀਰਸਮ੍ਭਵਾਨਾਮ੍| ਵਿਕਾਰਾਣਾਮਿਤਿ ਵਿਕਤਯੋ ਵਿਕਾਰਾਃ, ਤੇਨ ਵਿਕਾਰਾ ਅਤ੍ਰ ਕੁਪਿਤਾ ਦੋਸਾ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯੋਪਿ ਗਹ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ| ਏਸਃ ਪੂਰ੍ਵੋਕ੍ਤਃ| ਵਰ੍ਗਸ਼੍ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਃ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰਃ, ਆਹਾਰਾਚਾਰਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਕਾਲਕਤਭੇਦਾਤ੍; ‘ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਜਙ੍ਗਮਪਾਰ੍ਥਿਵਕਾਲਕਤਭੇਦਾਚ੍ਚਤੁਰ੍ਵਿਧਃ’ ਇਤਿ ਜੇਜ੍ਜਟਃ; ਪਞ੍ਜਿਕਾਕਾਰਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਦਂ ਨ ਮਨ੍ਯਤੇ| ਅਤ੍ਰਾਪਿ ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਪ੍ਰਕੋਪਪ੍ਰਸਰਸ੍ਥਾਨਸਂਸ਼੍ਰਯਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤਿਭੇਦੇਸੁ ਵਰ੍ਤਤੇ| ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ਮਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋਤ੍ਰ ਰੋਗੋਪਘਾਤਮਾਤ੍ਰਸ੍ਯੋਪਲਕ੍ਸਣਂ; ਤੇਨ ਸਾਧ੍ਯਾਨਾਂ ਸਿਦ੍ਧਃ, ਯਾਪ੍ਯਾਨਾਂ ਯਾਪਨਂ, ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਵਤ੍ਤਂ ਚ ਗਹ੍ਯਤੇ||੩੫||

Meaning of the commentary

The introductory words announce verses that make explicit what the prose has explained. One reason for announcing them is to help less experienced readers distinguish prose from verse; another explanation connects the wording with agreement with teachings such as the Veda. The restatement is not considered redundant because it clarifies an earlier meaning. Vikara includes both aggravated doshas and diseases. The fourfold group is explained as food, conduct, earthy substances, and factors associated with time. Jejjata instead identifies the four as stationary, moving, earthy, and time-associated groups; the Panjika commentator does not accept that division. Prakopa again covers the stages from aggravation through differentiation. Prashama is used broadly for overcoming disease, including resolution of curable conditions, continued management of yapya conditions, and maintenance of health.

Key terms

vargashcaturvidhaH (vargaś caturvidhaḥ)
The fourfold group, whose membership receives two distinct interpretations.
vikArAH (vikārāḥ)
Altered or disordered states, including aggravated doshas and diseases here.
yApanaM (yāpanaṃ)
Continued management or support of a yapya condition.

Adhikarana ੪੫ (੩੬-੩੭) · Śloka ੩੭

ਆਗਨ੍ਤਵਸ੍ਤੁ ਯੇ ਰੋਗਾਸ੍ਤੇ ਦ੍ਵਿਧਾ ਨਿਪਤਨ੍ਤਿ ਹਿ | ਮਨਸ੍ਯਨ੍ਯੇ ਸ਼ਰੀਰੇਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੇਸਾਂ ਤੁ ਦ੍ਵਿਵਿਧਾ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾ ||੩੬|| ਸ਼ਰੀਰਪਤਿਤਾਨਾਂ ਤੁ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਵਦੁਪਕ੍ਰਮਃ | ਮਾਨਸਾਨਾਂ ਤੁ ਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਾਦਿਰਿਸ੍ਟੋ ਵਰ੍ਗਃ ਸੁਖਾਵਹਃ ||੩੭||

View original

आगन्तवस्तु ये रोगास्ते द्विधा निपतन्ति हि | मनस्यन्ये शरीरेऽन्ये तेषां तु द्विविधा क्रिया ||३६|| शरीरपतितानां तु शारीरवदुपक्रमः | मानसानां तु शब्दादिरिष्टो वर्गः सुखावहः ||३७||

Meaning of the śloka

Externally caused disorders affect two kinds of locus: some affect the mind and others the body. Their management is correspondingly twofold. Those affecting the body are managed like bodily disorders. For those affecting the mind, agreeable experiences beginning with sound are described as bringing ease.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਮਾਗਨ੍ਤੂਨਾਮਾਸ਼੍ਰਯਭੇਦੇਨ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾਂ ਵਕ੍ਤੁਮਾਹ- ਆਗਨ੍ਤਵਸ੍ਤ੍ਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਮਨਸ੍ਯਨ੍ਯੇ ਇਤਿ ਏਕੇ, ਸ਼ਰੀਰੇਨ੍ਯੇ ਇਤ੍ਯਪਰੇ| ਸ਼ਰੀਰਪਤਿਤਾਨਾਮਾਗਨ੍ਤੂਨਾਂ ਖਡ੍ਗਾਦ੍ਯਭਿਘਾਤਜਾਨਾਂ ਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਾਣਾਮਿਵ, ਮਾਨਸਾਨਾਂ ਮਨਃਸਮ੍ਭੂਤਾਨਾਂ ਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਾਦਿਵਰ੍ਗਃ ਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਸ੍ਪਰ੍ਸ਼ਰੂਪਰਸਗਨ੍ਧਾਃ; ਇਸ੍ਟ ਇਤ੍ਯਭਿਪ੍ਰੇਤਸ਼੍ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾਤ੍ਵੇਨ| ਸੁਖਾਵਹ ਇਤਿ ਸੁਖਕਾਰੀ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਚਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਮਨੁਕ੍ਤਸਮੁਚ੍ਚਯਾਰ੍ਥਮਾਚਕ੍ਸਤੇ, ਤੇਨ ਧੈਰ੍ਯਸ੍ਮਤਿਪ੍ਰਭਤਯੋਪਿ ਮਾਨਸਾਨ੍ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਿਤੁਂ ਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟਾਃ||੩੬-੩੭||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentary explains the division by the site affected. Externally caused bodily disorders, such as injuries from a sword, receive an approach comparable to that used for bodily disease. For mental affliction, the group beginning with sound consists of sound, touch, visible form, taste, and smell; these are understood as agreeable and intended for therapeutic use, bringing comfort. Another interpretation takes cha to include measures not expressly named, such as dhairya and smriti, in the treatment of mental afflictions.

Key terms

shabdAdivargaH (śabdādivargaḥ)
The group of sensory experiences: sound, touch, form, taste, and smell.
iShTa (iṣṭa)
Agreeable or desired, qualifying those sensory experiences.
dhairyasmRuti (dhairyasmṛti)
Steadiness and recollection, additional measures included by an alternative interpretation.

Adhikarana ੪੬ (੩੮) · Śloka ੩੮

ਏਵਮੇਤਤ੍ ਪੁਰੁਸੋ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਰੌਸਧਂ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਾਲ ਇਤਿ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯਂ ਸਮਾਸੇਨ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤਮ੍ | ਤਤ੍ਰ ਪੁਰੁਸਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਤ੍ ਤਤ੍ਸਮ੍ਭਵਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਸਮੂਹੋ ਭੂਤਾਦਿਰੁਕ੍ਤਸ੍ਤਦਙ੍ਗਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਵਿਕਲ੍ਪਾਸ਼੍ਚ ਤ੍ਵਙ੍ਮਾਂਸਾਸ੍ਥਿਸਿਰਾਸ੍ਨਾਯੁਪ੍ਰਭਤਯਃ, ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦ੍ਵਾਤਪਿਤ੍ਤਕਫਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਸਨ੍ਨਿਪਾਤਵੈਸਮ੍ਯਨਿਮਿਤ੍ਤਾਃ ਸਰ੍ਵ ਏਵ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਯੋ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤਾਃ, ਔਸਧਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦ੍ਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਰਸਗੁਣਵੀਰ੍ਯਵਿਪਾਕਾਨਾਮਾਦੇਸ਼ਃ, ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਤ੍ ਸ੍ਨੇਹਾਦੀਨਿ ਚ੍ਛੇਦ੍ਯਾਦੀਨਿ ਚ ਕਰ੍ਮਾਣਿ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤਾਨਿ, ਕਾਲਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਤ੍ ਸਰ੍ਵਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਾਲਾਨਾਮਾਦੇਸ਼ਃ ||੩੮||

View original

एवमेतत् पुरुषो व्याधिरौषधं क्रियाकाल इति चतुष्टयं समासेन व्याख्यातम् | तत्र पुरुषग्रहणात् तत्सम्भवद्रव्यसमूहो भूतादिरुक्तस्तदङ्गप्रत्यङ्गविकल्पाश्च त्वङ्मांसास्थिसिरास्नायुप्रभृतयः, व्याधिग्रहणाद्वातपित्तकफशोणितसन्निपातवैषम्यनिमित्ताः सर्व एव व्याधयो व्याख्याताः, औषधग्रहणाद्द्रव्यरसगुणवीर्यविपाकानामादेशः, क्रियाग्रहणात् स्नेहादीनि च्छेद्यादीनि च कर्माणि व्याख्यातानि, कालग्रहणात् सर्वक्रियाकालानामादेशः ||३८||

Meaning of the śloka

Thus the fourfold subject—purusha, disease, medicinal substances, and therapeutic action with its timing—has been explained briefly. Purusha includes the constituents from which the person arises, beginning with the bhutas, and the divisions of the body such as skin, flesh, bone, siras, and snayus. Disease includes all disorders associated with imbalance of Vata, Pitta, Kapha, shonita, and their combined disturbance. Medicinal substances include dravya, rasa, guna, virya, and vipaka. Action includes measures beginning with sneha and operations beginning with cutting. Time includes the appropriate occasions for all these actions.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤਮਰ੍ਥਮੁਪਸਂਹਰਨ੍ਨਾਹ- ਏਵਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਏਵਮਿਤਿ ਅਨੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਰੇਣ| ਏਤਦਿਤਿ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਨਿਰ੍ਦਿਸ੍ਟਂ, ਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯਮਿਤਿ ਚਤੁਰਵਯਵਂ; ਯਦ੍ਯਪ੍ਯਤ੍ਰ ਪੁਰੁਸਾਦਯਃ ਪਞ੍ਚ, ਤਥਾਪਿ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯਂ ਜ੍ਞੇਯਂ; ਤਥਾਹਿ- ‘‘ਨਾਨ੍ਯਃ ਕਾਲਃ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਤੋਸ੍ਤਿ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾ ਨਾਨ੍ਯਾਥਵੌਸਧਾਤ੍| ਪ੍ਰਾਧਾਨ੍ਯਾਤ੍ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯਾਤ੍ਰ(ਥ) ਤਤੋ ਵ੍ਯਾਧਿਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯਮ੍|| ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਵਿਸ਼ਿਸ੍ਟਃ ਕਾਲੋ ਵਾ ਕਾਲੋ ਵਾ ਤਚ੍ਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯਮ੍’’- ਇਤਿ; ਅਤੋ ਨ ਸਙ੍ਖ੍ਯਾਤਿਰੇਕਃ| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਯੇਨ ਯਦੁਪਗਹੀਤਂ ਤਤ੍ਰ ਤਦੁਪਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਤਤ੍ਰੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਤਤ੍ਰੇਤਿ ਤਸ੍ਮਿਨ੍ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯਮਧ੍ਯੇ| ਤਤ੍ਸਮ੍ਭਵਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਸਮੂਹ ਇਤਿ ਤਸ੍ਯ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯ ਸਮ੍ਭਵ ਉਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਸ੍ਤਦਰ੍ਥੋ ਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਸਮੂਹਃ ਸ ਤਥਾ| ਕਃ ਪੁਨਰਸਾਵਿਤ੍ਯਾਹ- ਭੂਤਾਦਿਰਿਤਿ|- ਭੂਤਾਨਿ ਆਦੀਨਿ ਪ੍ਰਥਮਾਨਿ ਪ੍ਰਧਾਨਾਨਿ ਵਾ ਯਸ੍ਯ ਸ ਭੂਤਾਦਿਰਿਤਿ ਵਾਕ੍ਯਾਰ੍ਥਃ; ਤੇਨ ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਾਰ੍ਤਵਪਞ੍ਚਮਹਾਭੂਤਾਨੀਹ ਗਹ੍ਯਨ੍ਤੇ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤ੍ਵਨ੍ਯਥਾ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਨਯਨ੍ਤਿ- ਤਸ੍ਯ ਪੁਰੁਸਸ੍ਯ ਸਮ੍ਭਵਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਾਣਿ ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਾਦੀਨਿ, ਤੇਸਾਂ ਸਮੂਹਃ ਸਂਯੋਗਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਃ, ਕਥਮ੍ਭੂਤਃ ਸਃ? ਭੂਤਾਦਿਃ; ਭੂਤਂ ਮਹਾਭੂਤਂ ਪਥਿਵ੍ਯਾਦਿਕਮ੍, ਆਦਿਰ੍ਮੂਲਕਾਰਣਂ ਯਸ੍ਯ ਸ ਤਥਾ; ਅਥਵਾ ਤਤ੍ਸਮ੍ਭਵਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਸਮੂਹਃ ਸ਼ੁਕ੍ਰਸ਼ੋਣਿਤਾਦਿਸਂਯੋਗਃ ਸ ਭੂਤਾਨਾਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਿਨਾਮਾਦਿਃ ਮੂਲਕਾਰਣਂ, ਤਤ੍ਰ ਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤੀਭਾਵਾਤ੍| ਭੂਤਾਦਿਰਿਤ੍ਯਤ੍ਰੈਕੇ ਭੂਤਾਨਾਮਾਦਿਰ੍ਭੂਤਾਦਿਃ, ਅਵ੍ਯਕ੍ਤਾਦਾਰਭ੍ਯ ਯਾਵਤ੍ ‘ਸ ਏਸ ਕਰ੍ਮਪੁਰੁਸਸ਼੍ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾਧਿਕਤਃ’ (ਸ਼ਾ ੧) ਇਤਿ ਵਦਨ੍ਤਿ; ਤਨ੍ਨ, ਪਞ੍ਜਿਕਯਾ ਨਿਰਸ੍ਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍| ਤਦਙ੍ਗਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਵਿਕਲ੍ਪਾਸ਼੍ਚੇਤਿ ਅਙ੍ਗਾਨਿ ਮਸ੍ਤਕਾਦੀਨਿ, ਪ੍ਰਤ੍ਯਙ੍ਗਾਨਿ ਚਿਬੁਕਾਦੀਨਿ| ਤ੍ਵਙ੍ਮਾਂਸਸਿਰਾਸ੍ਨਾਯੁਪ੍ਰਭਤਯ ਇਤਿ ਤ੍ਵਚਃ ਸਪ੍ਤ, ਮਾਂਸਂ ਪੇਸ਼ੀਸ਼ਤਾਨਿ ਪਞ੍ਚ, ਸਿਰਾਸ਼ਤਾਨਿ ਸਪ੍ਤ, ਸ੍ਨਾਯੁਸ਼ਤਾਨਿ ਨਵ; ਪ੍ਰਭਤਿਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਤ੍ ਸ੍ਰੋਤੋਧਮਨ੍ਯਾਦਯਃ| ਸਰ੍ਵ ਏਵੇਤਿ ਸਰ੍ਵਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦਾਗਨ੍ਤੁਮਾਨਸਸ੍ਵਾਭਾਵਿਕਾਨਾਂ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਮ੍| ਦ੍ਰਵ੍ਯਂ ਸ੍ਥਾਵਰਾਦਿ, ਰਸਾ ਮਧੁਰਾਦਯਃ, ਗੁਣਾ ਗੁਰ੍ਵਾਦਯਃ, ਵੀਰ੍ਯਾਣਿ ਸ਼ੀਤੋਸ੍ਣਾਦੀਨਿ, ਦ੍ਵੌ ਵਿਪਾਕੌ ਗੁਰੁਲਘੂ; ਔਸਧਗ੍ਰਹਣਂ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਵਿਸ਼ੇਸਣਮ੍, ਅਤੋ ਨ ਸਙ੍ਖ੍ਯਾਤਿਰੇਕਃ| ਅਯਮਰ੍ਥਃ ਪੁਰੁਸਾਦਿਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯਪ੍ਰਸ੍ਤਾਵੇ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਤਃ| ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦਿਤਿ ਕ੍ਰਿਯਾਕਾਲਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੋਪਾਤ੍ਤਾਦਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ | ਸ੍ਨੇਹਾਦੀਨੀਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਾਤ੍ ਸ੍ਵੇਦਨਵਮਨਵਿਰੇਚਨਾਸ੍ਥਾਪਨਾਨੁਵਾਸਨਧੂਮਨਸ੍ਯਕਵਲਗ੍ਰਹਗਣ੍ਡੂਸਪਾਚਨਸਂਸ਼ਮਨਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਂ; ਛੇਦ੍ਯਾਦੀਨੀਤ੍ਯਾਦਿਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਾਦ੍ਭੇਦ੍ਯਲੇਖ੍ਯੈਸ੍ਯਾਹਾਰ੍ਯਵਿਸ੍ਰਾਵ੍ਯਸੀਵ੍ਯਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਗ੍ਰਹਣਮ੍| ਕਾਲਗ੍ਰਹਣਾਦਿਤਿ ਸ੍ਨੇਹਨਸ੍ਵੇਦਨਵਮਨਵਿਰੇਚਨਾਦੀਨਾਂ ਕਰ੍ਮਣਾਂ ਤਥਾ ਸ਼ਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਾਦਿਕਰ੍ਮਣਾਂ ਚ ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਮਾਣਸਮਯਨਿਰ੍ਦੇਸ਼ਃ| ਤਤ੍ਰ ਸ੍ਨੇਹਸ੍ਯ ‘ਪ੍ਰਤਪ੍ਤਚਾਮੀਕਰਪੀਤਲੋਹਿਤੇ ਸਵਿਤਰਿ’ (ਚਿ. ਅ. ੩੧) ਇਤਿ ਵਚਨਾਤ੍ ਕਾਲਨਿਰ੍ਦੇਸ਼ਃ, ਸਰ੍ਵਸ੍ਵੇਦਾਨਾਂ ਜੀਰ੍ਣਾਨ੍ਨਕਾਲਃ, ਵਮਨਸ੍ਯ ਪੂਰ੍ਵਾਹ੍ਣਕਾਲਃ, ਵਿਰੇਚਨਸ੍ਯ ਪ੍ਰਾਤਃ, ਪ੍ਰਾਤਰਿਤਿ ਦਿਨਸ੍ਯਾਦਿਤ੍ਰਯੋ ਮੁਹੂਰ੍ਤਾਃ, ਆਸ੍ਥਾਪਨਂ ਤੁ ਮਧ੍ਯਾਹ੍ਨੇ ਤਤੀਯੇ ਪ੍ਰਹਰੇ, ਅਨੁਵਾਸਨਂ ਸਾਯਾਹ੍ਨੇ ਕ੍ਵਚਿਤ੍ਪ੍ਰਦੋਸੇਪਿ, ਤਥਾ ਭੁਕ੍ਤਵਨ੍ਤਮਾਤੁਰਮੁਪਵੇਸ਼੍ਯੇਤ੍ਯਾਦ੍ਯਨੁਸਰ੍ਤਵ੍ਯਮ੍||੩੮||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentator addresses why the summary is called fourfold although person, disease, medicine, action, and time can be counted as five. He explains that time is not separate from action, or that action is not separate from medicinal means; time qualified by action can therefore be treated together in the fourfold account. The cited wording offers several ways of grouping these closely connected terms rather than adding a fifth independent subject. Under purusha, one reading takes the constituent group to include shukra, artava, and the five mahabhutas, with bhuta meaning the first or principal constituents. Another takes the group to be the conjunction of shukra, shonita, and related materials whose root causes are the mahabhutas. A further reading makes this conjunction the origin of living beings because they become manifest there. The interpretation beginning from avyakta under bhutadi is recorded but rejected on the authority of the Panjika. Angas include larger divisions such as the head, and pratyangas smaller divisions such as the chin. The commentary mentions seven layers of skin, five hundred muscles, seven hundred siras, and nine hundred snayus, with srotas and dhamanis included by 'and others.' These are the enumerations supplied by the commentary. 'All diseases' includes externally caused, mental, and naturally arising conditions. Dravya includes the stationary and other groups; rasa the tastes beginning with madhura; guna qualities such as guru; virya such properties as cold and heat; and vipaka the twofold guru and laghu classification used here. The action group includes sneha, svedana, vamana, virechana, asthapana, anuvasana, dhuma, nasya, kavala, gandusha, pachana, and samshamana. The operative group includes cutting, opening, scraping, probing, extraction, drainage, and suturing. Time refers to the occasions specified for these measures: examples include administration of sneha under a described condition of the sun, svedana after food has digested, vamana in the forenoon, virechana early in the day, and anuvasana later in the day or sometimes at early night. The detailed timing of asthapana in the supplied phrase needs review rather than a forced interpretation.

Key terms

catuShTayaM (catuṣṭayaṃ)
The fourfold framework formed by grouping related subjects in this summary.
kriyAkAla (kriyākāla)
Therapeutic action considered with its appropriate time.
a~ggapratya~gga (aṅgapratyaṅga)
The larger and smaller divisions of the body.
vipAkau gurulaghU (vipākau gurulaghū)
The two vipaka categories, guru and laghu, named in this commentary.

Adhikarana ੪੭ (੩੯) · Śloka ੩੯

ਭਵਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ- ਬੀਜਂ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਿਤਸ੍ਯੈਤਤ੍ਸਮਾਸੇਨ ਪ੍ਰਕੀਰ੍ਤਿਤਮ੍ | ਸਵਿਂਸ਼ਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਮਸ੍ਯ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾ ਭਵਿਸ੍ਯਤਿ ||੩੯||

View original

भवति चात्र- बीजं चिकित्सितस्यैतत्समासेन प्रकीर्तितम् | सविंशमध्यायशतमस्य व्याख्या भविष्यति ||३९||

Meaning of the śloka

This seed of treatment has been stated briefly. Its explanation will extend through one hundred and twenty chapters.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਅਨੇਨ ਚਤੁਸ੍ਟਯੇਨ ਸਕਲਮੇਵ ਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਵ੍ਯਾਪ੍ਤਮਿਤਿ ਨਿਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਿਤੁਮਾਹ- ਭਵਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਬੀਜਮਿਵ ਬੀਜਂ, ਯਥੈਕਂ ਬੀਜਂ ਭੂਮੌ ਨਿਕ੍ਸਿਪ੍ਤਂ ਮੂਲਕਾਣ੍ਡਸ਼ਾਖਾਪਤ੍ਰੈਰ੍ਦੂਰਤਰਵਿਸਾਰਿਤਮੁਪਜਾਯਤੇ, ਤਥੇਦਮਪਿ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਿਤਬੀਜਂ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਨਿਦਾਨਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾਕਲ੍ਪਸ੍ਥਾਨਾਦ੍ਯੈਰ੍ਵਿਸ੍ਤਤਮਾਰੋਗ੍ਯਫਲਂ ਭਵਤੀਤਿ| ਸਮਾਸੇਨ ਸਙ੍ਕ੍ਸੇਪੇਣ| ਸਵਿਂਸ਼ਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਮਿਤਿ ਵਿਂਸ਼ਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਮਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਸਵਿਂਸ਼ਮਿਤਿ ਸਹਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਕਿਂ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਜਨਮ੍? ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ, ਸਹਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨਾਤ੍ਰੋਤ੍ਤਰਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੇਣ ਸਹ ਵਿਂਸ਼ਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਮਿਤਿ ਉਤ੍ਤਰਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸਹਿਤਤ੍ਵਂ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਸ਼੍ਯਤੇ| ਨਨੁ, ਅਤ੍ਰ ਪਕ੍ਸੇ ਬੀਜਕਥਨੇਨੈਵਾਦ੍ਯਾਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ੍ਯ ਗਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ ਕਥਂ ਵਿਂਸ਼ਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਂ ਪੂਰ੍ਯਤੇ? ਨੈਵਂ, ਸਰ੍ਵਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੋਪਲਕ੍ਸਣਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍ਤਸ੍ਯੇਤਿ ਨਾਤ੍ਰੋਨਤ੍ਵਮ੍| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਸਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਮੂਨਾਰ੍ਥਮਾਚਕ੍ਸਤੇ, ਯਥਾ- ਸਲਵਣਂ ਸਤਿਕ੍ਤਂ ਸਕ੍ਸਾਰਮਿਤਿ| ਕਥਮਤ੍ਰੋਨਤਾ? ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ, ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਂ ਵਿਹਾਯ ਵਿਂਸ਼ਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਂ ਨ ਪੂਰ੍ਯਤੇ, ਏਕੇਨੋਨਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍; ਤਸ੍ਮਾਦੂਨਵਿਂਸ਼ਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਮਸ੍ਯ ਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾ ਭਵਿਸ੍ਯਤੀਤਿ| ਯਦ੍ਯੇਵਂ ਤਰ੍ਹਿ ਉਤ੍ਤਰਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸ੍ਯ ਕਥਂ ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤਿਃ? ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ, ਅਰ੍ਥਵਸ਼ਾਤ੍| ਨਨੁ, ਕਃ ਪੁਨਰਰ੍ਥੋ ਯਦ੍ਵਸ਼ਾਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤਿਃ? ਉਚ੍ਯਤੇ - ਸ਼ੇਸਾ ਅਰ੍ਥਾ ਉਤ੍ਤਰੇ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਪਾਦਨੀਯਾ ਇਤਿ| ਉਤ੍ਤਰਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਤਾਵਨ੍ਯੋ ਯੋਰ੍ਥੋਸ੍ਤਿ ਸ ਚ ਨ ਲਿਖਿਤੋ ਗ੍ਰਨ੍ਥਗੌਰਵਭਯਾਤ੍||੩੯||

Meaning of the commentary

The fourfold framework is called a seed because, like a seed that grows into roots, stem, branches, and leaves, it expands through the Sutra, Nidana, Sharira, Chikitsa, and Kalpa sections and bears health as its fruit. Samasa means brevity. Savimsham adhyaya-shatam is first explained as a hundred chapters with twenty added. The commentator discusses how the wording relates to the Uttara Tantra. One interpretation gives the sa or saha element the sense 'together with,' connecting the stated body of chapters with its Uttara Tantra supplement. The objection that the opening chapter has already been spent presenting the seed is answered by treating that chapter as representative of the whole teaching. Another interpretation gives sa a sense of something less or deficient: with the opening chapter excluded, the explanatory remainder is one hundred and nineteen chapters. On this reading, the Uttara Tantra is included by the requirements of the subject matter, because the remaining topics are to be explained there. A further argument for including it is mentioned but omitted to avoid length. These are alternative explanations of the wording and count, not a single revised total.

Key terms

bIjaM (bījaṃ)
A seed, the compact framework that expands into the full teaching.
samAsena (samāsena)
Briefly or in summary.
saviMshamadhyAyashatam (saviṃśamadhyāyaśatam)
A hundred chapters with twenty, whose wording is further interpreted in alternative ways.

Adhikarana ੪੮ (੪੦) · Śloka ੪੦

ਤਚ੍ਚ ਸਵਿਂਸ਼ਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਂ ਪਞ੍ਚਸੁ ਸ੍ਥਾਨੇਸੁ | ਤਤ੍ਰ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਨਿਦਾਨਸ਼ਾਰੀਰਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਿਤਕਲ੍ਪੇਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਥਵਸ਼ਾਤ੍ ਸਂਵਿਭਜ੍ਯੋਤ੍ਤਰੇ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ ਸ਼ੇਸਾਨਰ੍ਥਾਨ੍ ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਾਮਃ ||੪੦||

View original

तच्च सविंशमध्यायशतं पञ्चसु स्थानेषु | तत्र सूत्रनिदानशारीरचिकित्सितकल्पेष्वर्थवशात् संविभज्योत्तरे तन्त्रे शेषानर्थान् वक्ष्यामः ||४०||

Meaning of the śloka

Those one hundred and twenty chapters are distributed, according to their subject matter, among five sections: Sutra, Nidana, Sharira, Chikitsita, and Kalpa. The remaining subjects will be explained in the Uttara Tantra.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਤਚ੍ਚ ਸਵਿਂਸ਼ਮਿਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਤਚ੍ਚ ਸੋਤ੍ਤਰਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ ਵਿਂਸ਼ਤ੍ਯਧਿਕਮਧ੍ਯਾਯਸ਼ਤਂ ਪਞ੍ਚਸੁ ਸ੍ਥਾਨੇਸੁ| ਨਨੁ ਕਥਮੇਤਤ੍? ਉਤ੍ਤਰਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰਸ੍ਯ ਪਞ੍ਚਭ੍ਯਃ ਸ੍ਥਾਨੇਭ੍ਯਃ ਪਥਗੁਕ੍ਤਤ੍ਵਾਤ੍; ਨੈਵਂ, ਕੁਤਃ? ਪਞ੍ਚਸ੍ਵੇਵੇਤਿ ਨਿਯਮਾਭਾਵਾਤ੍| ਅਤ ਏਵਾਗ੍ਰੇ ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਤਿ- ਉਤ੍ਤਰੇ ਤਨ੍ਤ੍ਰੇ ਸ਼ੇਸਾਨਰ੍ਥਾਨ੍ ਵਕ੍ਸ੍ਯਾਮ ਇਤਿ| ਸ਼ੇਸਾਨਰ੍ਥਾਨਿਤਿ ਸ਼ੇਸਸ਼ਬ੍ਦੇਨ ਰਸਭੇਦਾਦਯਃ ਸ੍ਵਸ੍ਥਵਤ੍ਤਾਦਯਸ਼੍ਚ ਜ੍ਞੇਯਾਃ||੪੦||

Meaning of the commentary

The commentary continues to read the body of one hundred and twenty chapters together with the Uttara Tantra supplement. It raises the objection that Uttara Tantra is separately named from the five sections. The answer is that the wording does not say 'in these five only,' and the following promise explicitly places the remaining topics in Uttara Tantra. Those remaining topics include distinctions of rasa and matters of svasthavritta.

Key terms

sthAneShu (sthāneṣu)
Within the major sections of the treatise.
arthavashAt (arthavaśāt)
According to the requirements of the subject matter.
sheShAnarthAn (śeṣānarthān)
The remaining subjects assigned to Uttara Tantra.

Adhikarana ੪੯ (੪੧) · Śloka ੪੧

ਭਵਤਿ ਚਾਤ੍ਰ- ਸ੍ਵਯਮ੍ਭੁਵਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਕ੍ਤਮਿਦਂ ਸਨਾਤਨਂ ਪਠੇਦ੍ਧਿ ਯਃ ਕਾਸ਼ਿਪਤਿਪ੍ਰਕਾਸ਼ਿਤਮ੍ | ਸ ਪੁਣ੍ਯਕਰ੍ਮਾ ਭੁਵਿ ਪੂਜਿਤੋ ਨਪੈਰਸੁਕ੍ਸਯੇ ਸ਼ਕ੍ਰਸਲੋਕਤਾਂ ਵ੍ਰਜੇਤ੍ ||੪੧||

View original

भवति चात्र- स्वयम्भुवा प्रोक्तमिदं सनातनं पठेद्धि यः काशिपतिप्रकाशितम् | स पुण्यकर्मा भुवि पूजितो नृपैरसुक्षये शक्रसलोकतां व्रजेत् ||४१||

Meaning of the śloka

The verse praises the study of this enduring teaching, first spoken by Svayambhu and made manifest by the king of Kashi: one who studies it is described as performing meritorious acts, being honoured by rulers on earth, and, when life ends, attaining the same world as Shakra.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਦਾਨੀਂ ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤ੍ਯਧ੍ਯਾਯੇ ਨਿਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਿਤਸ੍ਯ ਚਿਕਿਤ੍ਸਾਬੀਜੋਪਦੇਸ਼ਨ੍ਯਾਯੇਨ ਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਸ੍ਯ ਪਾਠਾਨੁਸ਼ਂਸਾਮਾਹ- ਸ੍ਵਯਮ੍ਭੁਵੇਤ੍ਯਾਦਿ| ਸ੍ਵਯਮ੍ਭੁਵਾ ਬ੍ਰਹ੍ਮਣਾ, ਪ੍ਰੋਕ੍ਤਮ੍ ਉਪਦਿਸ੍ਟਮ੍, ਇਦਮਿਤਿ ਸ਼ਾਸ੍ਤ੍ਰਂ, ਸਨਾਤਨਂ ਨਿਤ੍ਯਂ, ਯਃ ਪਠੇਤ੍ ਅਧੀਯੀਤ; ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ਪਠਧਾਤੁਰਤ੍ਰ ਚਤੁਰ੍ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਥੇਸੁ, ਤਥਾਹਿ- ਪਾਠੇ, ਅਰ੍ਥਜ੍ਞਾਨੇ, ਕਰ੍ਮਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਨੇ, ਅਭ੍ਯਾਸੇ ਚ| ਹਿ ਸ੍ਫੁਟਮ੍| ਕਾਸ਼ਿਪਤਿਪ੍ਰਕਾਸ਼ਿਤਮ੍ ਆਦਿਦੇਵੇਨ ਧਨ੍ਵਨ੍ਤਰਿਣਾ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਸ਼ਿਤਮ੍| ਭੁਵਿ ਪਥਿਵ੍ਯਾਮ੍| ਪੂਜਿਤੋ ਨਪੈਰਿਤਿ ਨਪੈਃ ਨਰੇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰੈਃ, ਏਤੇਨ ਐਹਿਕਂ ਫਲਂ ਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਤਿ| ਅਸੁਕ੍ਸਯੇ ਪ੍ਰਾਣਕ੍ਸਯੇ| ਸ਼ਕ੍ਰਸਲੋਕਤਾਮ੍ ਇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰਸਮਾਨਲੋਕਤਾਂ ਵ੍ਰਜਤਿ, ਏਤੇਨ ਪਾਰਲੌਕਿਕਂ ਸ਼੍ਰੇਯੋ ਦਰ੍ਸ਼ਯਤਿ| ਅਨ੍ਯੇ ਤੁ ‘ਸ਼ਕ੍ਰਸੁਲੋਕਤਾਂ ਵ੍ਰਜੇਤ੍’ ਇਤਿ ਪਠਨ੍ਤਿ; ਸੁਸ਼ਬ੍ਦਃ ਪੂਜਾਵਚਨਃ, ਤੇਨ ਸ਼ਕ੍ਰਲੋਕਪੂਜ੍ਯਤਾਂ ਵ੍ਰਜੇਤ੍ ਪ੍ਰਾਪ੍ਨੁਯਾਦਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ| ਏਤੇਨ ਭੁਵਿ ਨਰੇਨ੍ਦ੍ਰੈਃ ਸ੍ਵਰ੍ਗੇ ਚ ਦੇਵੈਃ ਪੂਜਿਤੋ ਭਵੇਦਿਤ੍ਯਰ੍ਥਃ||੪੧||

Meaning of the commentary

Svayambhu is identified as Brahma, prokta means taught, and sanatana means enduring or eternal. Path means study. Another interpretation extends the verb to four activities: recitation, understanding the meaning, observing practical work, and practice. Kashipati is identified as the primordial Dhanvantari who made the teaching manifest. Honour from rulers expresses a benefit in this world. Asukshaya means the ending of the life-breaths. Shakra-salokata means sharing Indra's world, expressing the otherworldly benefit. An alternative reads Shakra-sulokata and interprets su as honour, giving the sense of becoming honoured in Shakra's world. The concluding explanation thus speaks of honour from rulers on earth and from gods in heaven.

Key terms

sanAtanaM (sanātanaṃ)
Enduring or eternal, as the teaching is described here.
paThet (paṭhet)
One should study; another interpretation includes recitation, understanding, observation, and practice.
shakrasalokatAM (śakrasalokatāṃ)
Sharing the world of Shakra or Indra, the traditional reward stated in the verse.

Adhikarana ਪੁਸ੍ਪਿਕਾ · Śloka ੧

ਇਤਿ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਸਂਹਿਤਾਯਾਂ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਸ੍ਥਾਨੇ ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਰ੍ਨਾਮ ਪ੍ਰਥਮੋਧ੍ਯਾਯਃ ||੧||

View original

इति सुश्रुतसंहितायां सूत्रस्थाने वेदोत्पत्तिर्नाम प्रथमोऽध्यायः ||१||

Meaning of the śloka

Thus ends the first chapter, called Vedotpatti, in the Sutrasthana of the Sushruta Samhita.

🔊 Audio coming soon

Show commentary

ਇਤਿ ਸ਼੍ਰੀਡਲ੍ਹ(ਹ੍ਣ)ਣਵਿਰਚਿਤਾਯਾਨ੍ਨਿਬਨ੍ਧਸਙ੍ਗ੍ਰਹਾਖ੍ਯਾਯਾਂ ਸੁਸ਼੍ਰੁਤਵ੍ਯਾਖ੍ਯਾਯਾਂ ਸੂਤ੍ਰਸ੍ਥਾਨੇ ਵੇਦੋਤ੍ਪਤ੍ਤਿਰ੍ਨਾਮ ਪ੍ਰਥਮੋਧ੍ਯਾਯਃ||੧||

Meaning of the commentary

Thus ends the first chapter, called Vedotpatti, in the Sutrasthana of the commentary on Sushruta called Nibandhasangraha, composed by Shri Dalhana.

Key terms

vedotpattirnAma (vedotpattir nāma)
Called Vedotpatti, the title identified in the chapter colophon.
nibandhasa~ggrahAkhyAyAM (nibandhasaṅgrahākhyāyāṃ)
In the work named Nibandhasangraha, identifying the commentary.